Home

User Manual - Grass Valley

1. 02 00 S index 1 video input 0 shared 03 00 index 2 video output 0 01 00 100000 index 3 JPEG codec 0 at 100KB 01 02 CD Default connect video input video output 01 03 CD Default connect video input gt video codec 03 02 CS Schedule connect video codec video output now do the audio connections 1 4 00 00 index 4 audio codecs 00 01 index 5 audio codecs 00 02 index 6 audio codecs 00 03 index 7 audio codecs 10 00 index 8 audio outputs 1 4 10 01 index 9 10 02 index 10 10 03 index 11 228 Sample Configuration Files now do the LTC to recorder 1 04 00 S index 12 ITC input 07 00 index 13 LTC output 09 00 index 14 tcRecorder 12 13 CD 12 14 CD 14 13 CS Assigning a Second JPEG Codec This example is the same as the basic configuration but it adds another JPEG codec connected to the same video input This sample file is supplied as 2JpegSample cfg in the c Profile configs directory on the Profile system drive format is 2 digit base 10 numbers format XX YY funcl func2 starting col 1 format if coll is not between O 4 9 its a comment format optional parameters with white space separators start in col 6 format the rest is available 02 00 S index 1 video input 0 shared 03 00 index 2 video output 0 01 00 100000 index 3 JPEG codec 0 at 100KB 01 02 CD Default connect index1 5inde
2. 4 64 Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced 66 Video Output e nnn 67 Analog Composite Video Output n sssaaa annae 67 Analog Composite Video Output Vertical Interval 70 Analog Composite Monitor Output s s ssassn aeaa 71 Analog Composite Monitor Output Burn in Timecode 73 Serial Digital Component Video Output nnana naana eanan 74 Serial Digital Component Video Output Advanced 76 PDR100 Audio 0 2 22 ne 77 Analog Audio Input cee tee 78 Digital Audio Input sss 79 Analog Audio Output aaas ee 81 Digital Audio Output BR 82 PDR200 Audio 235232 kanaba bs mad ba ALA GN AA hahha ET UN NS 83 Analog Audio Input 0 cee tte ee 84 Digital Audio Input lisse 86 Analog Audio Output ee ee 89 Digital Audio Output eee 92 Audio Configuration for the PDR200 a 93 Input and Output Mapping isses 93 Input Mapping i rei EA PESE br ioi eiie s dens 95 Output Mapping sse II 96 Input Clockilig 23x xo ede UD E PUE MEE REEPE EE QR 96 Audio Configuration Monitor Channels Tab 99 System Audio Configuration llle 101 Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking 00 102 Using Media Manager Starting and Exiting the Media Manager 106 Starting Other Applications from the Tools Menu 108 Viewing and Hiding t
3. For timecode generators timecode format timecode mode time to seed user bits to seed If you don t specify parameters the default values are used You can override the defaults in the cfg file or by using the API calls Acceptable values for these parameters are shown in Table 14 Table 14 Timecode Parameters 2 TcModeFieldLocked 3 TcModeRegenHold 4 TcModeRegenFlywheel Parameter Acceptable Values Default timecode 0 Drop frame 1 format 1 Non drop frame timecode 0 TcModeFreeze 2 mode 1 TcModeFreeRun time to seed frame second minute hour user bits to seed 32 bits in reverse byte order last third second first Each resource allocation line is assigned an index number in sequential order independent of comment lines or crosspoint lines Thus the first resource line found in an NCS file is assigned index number 1 the second is assigned index number 2 etc These index numbers may be used by the crosspoint lines which are described in the following section 226 Manually Editing a Configuration File Crosspoint lines Crosspoint lines assign default and scheduled crosspoints between resources A basic explanation of these events is included below The following is the column by column layout of crosspoint lines Column 1 2 source index number Column 3 separator Column 4 5 destination index number Column 6 separator Column 7 cross
4. System System System E System System System System E System 000 System System Figure 42 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Clocking tab Audio Configuration Monitor Channels Tab To change the input clocking 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB Configuration button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Click the Input Clocking tab if it isn t already displayed 2 Click the button in the Audio Clock Reference Source column for the desired channels and select one of up to five choices System default or Video Input The number of video inputs depends on the number of available video channels Selecting one of the video inputs sets the group of four channels to use the selected input as their audio clocking source 3 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab Audio Configuration Monitor Channels Tab Under the Monitor Channels tab you can select recording and playback quality and adjust monitor channels 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB Es Configuration button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 43 Audio Signal Processing Board 1 J6 Figure 43 Audio Configuration dialog box Monitor Channels tab Profile Family 99 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 2 Click the Monitor Channels tab 3 Under Monitor Channels the Channel Selectio
5. 1 In the Edit window choose File Open and select the desired list When the list opens choose Edit Schedule List to integrate the list into the On air List 2 In the Monitor view drag the list from a Media Manager window to the On air List The dragged events are added to the bottom of the On air List Make sure you select the appropriate channel before dragging in the list then change the Channel settings to match In either case List Manager checks for conflicts with events already in the On air List If it finds any conflicts such as events using the same channel or output at the same time it will report these errors so that you can take corrective action The word Error will appear in the status cell of the event causing the conflict Right click on the event choose Event Property Alt Enter and read the error information in the Event Properties dialog box You can also double click the event to get properties Closing a List To close a list Choose File Close List Exporting a List To export a list into an ASCII text file st 1 Click the Edit window tab 2 Choose File Export A dialog box appears 3 Enter the a name of the file you want to save in the File Name box 4 Click OK The st extension is added to the file name automatically Profile Family 303 T Chapter 9 304 Using the List Manager List File ASCII Text Format The file format for an ASCII text list file follows these rule
6. Resource Manager B010278 x Channel A Channel B Name Type Add Channel Channel 4 Player Recorder bag Remove Channel 8 Channel A Video H Track 1 MPEG 3 Audio Qj Track 1 Qj Track 2 l Timecode Add Track Bs Track 1 Delete Track 5g Decoder MPEG Rec 2 Crosspoints Figure 155 MPEG encoder and decoder check boxes Profile Family 323 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Resource Manager B010278 ca Timecode 9d Track 1 Figure 156 JPEG codec check boxes 324 Profile Family Configuring Video Resources Field and Frame Setup NOTE You can select field dominance only for JPEG MPEG is set by default to Field 1 dominance To set field dominance and still play mode 1 Select the Video icon in the configuration tree the field dominance and still play mode controls appear at the bottom of the Resource Manager dialog box see Figure 157 2 Field dominance determines which field is the mark in or mark out point for the frame The default is Field 1 To set it to Field 2 click the button 3 Still play mode determines whether your still frames are interlaced or line doubled Line Double is the default With Interlaced you may get some flicker in still display Line double reduces flicker Click the button you want The Field Frame Setup button is always depressed because when the Video track type is sele
7. Time Remaining 00 00 00 00 Disk Free Space 16539 MB Stn Name Status Bemove Help Profile Family 33 Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family mE 25 Profile Disk Utility Eie Disk Utities Help Physical Volume intemal G3 Internal SCSIID C3 A30 DAO Sano Saco Sca0 Scao Sco S ceo al Data Set INT Serial No Vendor NGO51269 NGO53268 LA27180 NGOS1466 NGO50373 NGO52077 LA211607 NGO54015 SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE SEAGATE No of Disks 8 368 io of Blocks _ Block Size 4096 2373630 Disk See Curent DataSet T _MskeDataSet _ Set Label Model STISIZIW STiStzIw STiStzIw ST19171w sTisi7iw sriStzIw sTisi7iw STIsI7IWw Revision Bad Blocks Medium Errore 0308 gm Detal Log VdrPanel VdrPanel enables you to capture and trim video and audio clips and then play them back By default VdrPanel starts automatically when you power on your Profile system For more information refer to Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Profile Disk Utility As shipped from the factory Profile media disks come preformatted and with a file system already created Profile Disk Utility allows you to create new file systems reformat disks and change disk labels To find out more about how to use this utility refer to Chapte
8. 1 Double click on the Port Server icon This starts the Fibre Channel communication tool It must always be running on any machine where you are using Fibre Channel If you want you can place Port Server in StartUp folder and set it to run minimized Make sure its running on the other Profile machine too 2 After configuring all machines verify name resolution using fcping by typing fcping PROFILE1 fcO If this command returns Host PROFILE1 fc0 is up You have successfully resolved the name PROFILE1 fc0 to the IP address 192 168 100 1 Keep in mind that although this verifies name resolution it does not test Fibre Channel connectivity If however the fcping command returns Host PROFILE1 fc0 appears unreachable The Fibre Channel IP address could not resolve properly You may want to reboot to ensure that any changes have taken effect or check your spelling 3 Now start the Media Manager by double clicking its icon You only need to run Media Manager when you want to manually copy clips from one machine to another but the Port Server needs to be run at all times on all machines connected to the Fibre Channel network or they won t be seen by Media Manager For information on how to use Media Manager see Chapter 3 Using Media Manager on page 105 Profile Family 249 T Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking You will not automatically see the other machine on the network For example if you are running Media Manag
9. 4 Click Format on the dialog box to continue formatting the disks Format Disk s x Block Size 4096 v Time Remaining _ Cancel Figure 103 Format Disk s dialog box 206 Profile Family Loading Microcode Loading Microcode To load microcode for your hard disks 1 In the lower pane select the drive or drives where you want to load microcode 2 Choose Disk Utilities Load Microcode or click the Load Microcode button to open this dialog box Look in S bin ef x wl je cu4w6001 lod File name l Files of type Microcode Files lod Cancel Figure 104 Microcode Filename to Load dialog box 3 Double click on a filename or enter the name of the microcode od file in the Filename box and click Open to load the microcode see Table 11 NOTE Before loading microcode check what make of drive you have in the Vendor field of the lower pane in the Disk Utility window Table 11 Microcode update files File Name Disk Type cu4w6001 lod Seagate 4 gigabyte disk drives cu9w6004 lod Seagate 9 gigabyte drives c91p5724 lod Seagate low profile 9 gigabyte drives ibm9G_51 lod IBM 9 gigabyte drives Profile Family 207 T Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility Relocating and Testing Bad Blocks The reason why bad block errors are reported is usually not because the physical block cluster is damaged Often the reason is because when the system at
10. Choose Paste on the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar If there is a clip with the same name in the bin where you want to restore it you are prompted to change the name or cancel the operation Profile Family Renaming an Archived Clip To restore a clip using the drag and drop method 1 In the tree pane click the cartridge icon you want to restore a clip from This expands the tree pane to reveal the partition icon or icons Click the partition in the tree pane that you want to restore from to reveal the clips in the contents pane In the contents pane click on the clip icon or icons you want to restore hold the left mouse button and drag it to the bin icon in the tree pane where you want to restore the clip If you want to check on the progress of a restore operation click on the Profile logo or choose Tools Transfer Monitor to view the Transfer Monitor Renaming an Archived Clip A clip can have a name up to 32 characters long Spaces are legal characters but count for two characters Colons and slashes are illegal in clip names Tildes are only illegal as a first character in a clip name To rename an archived clip 1 In the tree pane select the library cartridge and partition where the archived clip is stored In the contents pane select the archived clip you want to rename Choose Rename from th
11. ET buffers at c1380609 size 524288 ET buffers at c338880B88 size 524288 ET buffers at c5380000 size 524288 ET buffers at c7380888 size 524288 DEC memory at c cBcOBB size 7815168 memory at c2c c 8 size 7815168 memory at c4c c 8 size 7815168 memory at c6cUcBBB size 7815168 4 video codec channels d disk recorder slave board in slot 13 hu Feb 13 18 35 06 1997 ef genlock videoStandard is the same no change CY Figure 106 WinTail window 2 To view other logs choose File Open NOTE Because it is a binary file you cannot view scsi log with WinTail See The Detail Log on page 209 for instructions on how to view scsi log You can view three sets of logs 1 The PDR Access Control service records messages from the real time processor into profile log As installed the WinTail application reads this log file by default 2 VdrPanel logs all RS 422 protocol messages for supported third party protocols Logging occurs to files VdrPanel ABCD 000 and VdrPanel ABCD 001 in the directory where VdrPanel is run Logging has a timing resolution of 10 msec Use a dedicated RS 422 logger for better resolution and accuracy Viewing Profile Logs Logging for each panel may be turned off by setting the value MsgLogger to 0 in these registry keys with the Windows NT registry editor regedit HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services NtrService Chan ABCD NOTE Logger does not log dupli
12. format XX YY funcl func2 starting col 1 format if coll is not between O amp 9 it is a comment format optional parameters with white space separators start in col 6 MPEG Encoder format 12 YY bitrate format GopEnd iPerGOP pPerI bPerIP PixStruct FirstEncodedLine LastEncodedLine YY is the of the Encoder resource bitrate between 4000000 0 and 50000000 0 Default 18000000 format 422 or 420 Default 422 GopEnd 0 2GopOpenEnd 1 GopClosedEnd Default 1 iPerGOP reserved Must be 1 pPerI The number of p Pix per I Pix Default 5 Range 1 10 bPerIP The number of b Pix per IP Pix Default 2 Range 1 2 PixStruct O PixStructFrame 1 PixStructureField Must be O Max LastEncodedLine exclusive 263 NTSC 313 PAL Profile Family 231 T Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities 232 FirstEncodedLine inclusive LastEncodedLin Number of lines per field Number of lines per field 240 256 NTSC 4 2 2 288 PA 304 PA NTSC 4 2 0 L 4 2 0 L 4 2 2 Also FirstEncodedLine LastEncodedLine should be divis ible by 16 for exampl O 21 261 for exampl 0 5 261 for exampl e NTSC 4 2 0 12 00 e NTSC 4 2 2 12 00 1 4 2 0 12 00 0 23 XII for exampl 0 7 311 e PAL 4 2 2 12 00 Video Resour
13. 2 Select the panel you want to display Panel A through H Only panels that are not currently open appear in the dialog box You can also press Ctrl A through Ctrl H to activate panels A through H 3 Click OK Making a Panel Active To make a panel active such as Panel A do either of the following Click anywhere inside Panel A if open Or Choose Window 1 Panel A Panel Control Arranging Panels and Icons If a panel is obscured by another panel you can arrange the panels so that they are all completely visible To arrange the panels in this way Choose Window Tile Panels Profile Family 187 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel If you have minimized the panels you can arrange the icons with Choose Window Arrange Icons Viewing Record Capacity The Record Capacity dialog box shows the amount of recording time remaining on the current media disk volume according to the current compression presets To view the recording capacity 1 Click a panel to make it active 2 Choose Window Record Capacity A message box appears Figure 89 In this instance the message box shows the internal disks labeled NT The recording time remaining is represented in Hours Minutes Seconds For more information on compression presets see Setting Compression Presets on page 168 Panel A Record Capacity x Figure 89 Message box showing record capacity 3 Click Close Viewing an Audio Monitor for a
14. Also a video display device without audio capabilities Mouse An input device that when moved across a flat surface causes the pointer to move across a screen The mouse usually has buttons that you press to send signals These signals in turn accomplish certain functions The representation of the mouse on the screen is called the pointer See Pointer MPEG MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group is a set of standards used for compressing digital video and audio MPEG uses compression methods that maintain high quality while requiring smaller bandwidths to transport video and audio streams NTSC The standard composite color format used in North America and Japan that was developed by the National Television Standards Committee Off line cartridge The archive library has immediate access of up to 80 cartridges However the library database can contain information about any number of cartridges A cartridge is considered off line when it has been ejected from the library storage device but remains in the library database PAL The Phase Alternate Line standard is used to encode color information in Western European composite video Panel TimeDelay The graphical representation of a channel The record panel shows controls for the record channel A player panel shows controls for a play channel 374 Profile Family Glossary Partitions To give the archive tape transports some degree of random access a data cartridg
15. Profile Family 69 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Video Output Vertical Interval The Vertical Interval tab brings up the analog composite video output vertical interval controls that determine how the vertical interval signals are handled 1 Click the Vertical Interval tab to view the vertical interval controls The vertical interval line numbers change depending on the selected video standard see Figure 22 Analog Composite Video Output J11 A Composite OutA J11 Uriela Figure 22 Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval tab 2 Click in the boxes for each line to enable Procamp the settings are the same as the regular video VITC if VITC Generator Enable is selected or to Pass Video through All or none of the options can be selected for each line The default buttons for Procamp VITC and Pass Video reset these specified values back to the factory presets NOTE If the Pass Video box is not checked the input video is replaced with black Do not check Pass Video for VITC lines as Pass Video overrides VITC insertion 3 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 4 Click Close to accept the changes 70 Profile Family Analog Composite Monitor Output Analog Composite Monitor Output To open the Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box 1 Select Video Output from th
16. Profile Family 209 T Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility 210 Profile Family Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities This chapter shows you how to read Profile logs with WinTail capture Profile logs with the capture tool assign Profile Protocol resources for RS 422 ports controlled by Profile Protocol and managed by ProLink access a Profile system from a remote PC with PortServer and how to manually stop and start the PDR Access Control service Viewing Profile Logs You can view Profile system logs with the graphical log viewer WinTail This log viewer allows you to see the end of a log file To view any of the Profile system log files 1 Double click on the Profile Log shortcut icon on the Windows NT desktop or choose Start PDR Applications Profile Log By default the WinTail application views profile log WinTail automatically checks log files for updates every two seconds Profile Family 211 Chapter6 Using Profile Utilities 212 BA WinTail profile log L 0 Ei File Edit View Window Help 8 xl 06 00 SEAGATE ST15150Y 6661 ound genlock board in ound component serial ound component serial DInitBoard component DInitBoard component ound Tx4 analog audio slot 14 digital video board in slot 3 digital video board in slot 7 serial digital video board at serial digital video board at board in slot 4 board in slot 5 board in slot 8 board in slot 9 ound file system INT
17. Profile Family 259 t Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor T View All Media Name Start Time End Time Length Tracks Last Cha ih 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 06 05 96 E New Master Timeline Eject Open Bin Delete Media Bin Toolbar Insert Media Load Media Figure 120 Current bin display Below the current bin display is a set of buttons from left to right Load Media Loads a selected master onto the edit timeline or a selected clip onto the capture timeline Insert Media Inserts a selected clip into the currently loaded master on the edit timeline near the location of the current timeline cursor Timeline Eject Ejects media from the active timeline New Master Creates a new empty master ready to receive clips New Bin Creates a new bin within a volume and displays it in the current bin display Open Bin Opens an existing bin and displays it on the current bin display Delete Media Deletes selected media 260 Profile Family Opening a Bin Opening a Bin To open or change the current bin 1 Click the Open Bin button 2 Enter the name in the text box or select the desired bin from the list box and press OK 3 The selected bin is loaded into the current bin display Creating a New Bin You will often want to create a new bin to store and organize new media To create a new bin 1 Click the New Bin button below the current bin display and the new bin dialog box
18. T Contents The Capture Timeline llle 264 Capturing a New Clip 0 0000 eee 266 LOOP Recorditnig 2 o istas aoon cr Rot et etin mecs e qat d 268 Playing a Clip acide nette Rea Re esce Ah nde 269 Trimming a Clip IR 269 Creating a Subclip eee 270 User Marks en 271 Event and Frame Controls a 272 Shuttle Controls ere 272 Creating Subclips on the Fly 2 ee eee 272 The Edit Timeline i c ee baw bebe ede dna 273 Creating a New Master llle 275 Adding Media to a Master 000 eee eee eee 275 Playing a Master s sica eei Rma Roh m UR inip ii 276 Using the Audio Controls llle 277 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts a 279 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager List Manager Overview 0c cee eR 281 Starting List Manager 00 00 e ee eee es 283 Viewing Help 6 Kana ates eme tne ERRARE ae a ease RR 284 Closing List Manager 284 Configuring Resources liliis 285 Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine 286 Building a Playback List 0 cece eee 287 Adding Media for Playback 0 0 00 e eee eee ee 287 Changing Event Settings cece eee 289 Optional Columns cee eee eee 291 Settings Unique to Transfer Events 292 Settings Unique to Archive Events 292 Monitoring a List as it Runs 00a 293 Validating a Li
19. You can configure the PDR 200 or 300 to operate with analog AES EBU digital or embedded SMPTE 272M Level A audio depending on which options are installed in your system All three audio formats are supported without external conversion equipment Analog audio is only available with an optional PAC208 or PAC216 Analog Digital Interface chassis You can expand the number of XLR or BNC connectors for AES EBU audio with an optional XLR216 or BNC216 Digital Interface chassis You can choose an audio format for each video channel For example you could enable analog audio on one channel embedded audio on another and AES EBU on the rest There are several video boards that allow a Profile video server to be used with various standard video formats composite analog serial digital component or component analog video are all possible All boards accept 525 or 625 NTSC or PAL video standards The latest analog composite input and output board offers two input and output channels per board The two output channels for this board are similar to the output channels of the original analog composite board An analog composite monitor board allows you to display text and burn in timecode on an output monitor The component analog input allows dithering auto timing and vertical blanking As with other inputs you can automate VITC detection You can adjust input gain and also select an input format such as Betacam A serial digital component board
20. appears in the Timecode Output list box for Channel A only if you ve selected SDI Out J6 as a video output for Channel A If you remove a video output for a channel any request for the corresponding VITC output is also removed Profile Family 331 T Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Choosing Timecode Codecs NOTE Use of the Advanced panel as described in the following step is necessary only if you want to specify the exact codec resource to be used By default the system chooses a codec resource for you based on availability This default option is indicated by displaying Any for your codec selection To select a timecode codec 1 With a timecode Track selected in the configuration tree click the Advanced button The Timecode Codec check boxes appear see Figure 163 2 Choose one of the eight timecode codecs or None 332 Profile Family Configuring Timecode Resources Resource Manager B010278 Figure 163 Timecode Codec check boxes Profile Family 333 T Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Timecode Generator Settings If you have selected Internal Generator as your timecode input there are several other settings that you can make to the timecode generator The controls for making these settings are available only when the timecode input is Internal Generator and are dimmed for any other timecode input To change timecode generator settings 1 With a timecode Track selected in
21. e The record channel should always use a valid timecode input This input may come from an external VITC or LTC source or may simply be a Profile timecode generator Timecode display and the Auto Start feature are affected if the connected VITC or LTC source does not provide valid timecode Whenconfiguring playback channels which only play material you do not need to select input resources for video audio and timecode tracks Profile Family Configuring Channels with Resource Manager Handling Resource Allocation Errors Resource conflicts can occur when another application is running on the same Profile unit as TimeDelay TimeDelay channels might conflict with each other if the same output is used on more than one channel When there is a resource conflict and all TimeDelay resources cannot be allocated the warning dialog box shown in Figure 173 will appear TimeDelay Could not allocate all requested resources Edit again w Figure 173 Warning dialog box Click the Yes button to return to the Resource Manager dialog and resolve conflicts If you click No and do not resolve the resource conflicts TimeDelay cannot function correctly Profile Family 349 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Starting the TimeDelay Process The basic time delay process involves recording program material and playing it back after a specified time has elapsed You accomplish this using the Record and Playback panels in the TimeDelay wi
22. 110 Profile Family Connecting to a Remote Machine 2 To add a remote Profile machine to the network host list click Add The Add Network Host dialog box appears Add Network Host New Host Name Figure 48 Add Network Host dialog box 3 Enter the name of the machine in the New Host Name box This can be the host name or the machine s IP address such as 128 161 37 138 4 Click OK The new host name is added to the network host list You can click the Add button again to add as many machine names as you want 5 Click OK The connection status message box appears to show the progress of new connections To remove a Profile machine from the network host list 1 Choose Add Remove Machine from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click on a machine volume or network icon in the tree pane You can also click the Add Remove Machine button on the toolbar The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears 2 Select the name of the machine you want to remove in Network Host List box 3 Click Remove 4 Click OK Profile Family 111 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Viewing the Media Hierarchy 112 The Media Manager window is divided into two main sections the tree and contents panes Clips and masters appear in the contents pane Items are listed alphabetically In the tree pane you can expand or collapse the tree hierarchy by clicking on the plus or minus control buttons as shown in Figur
23. Cancel Figure 98 Load Group of Clips dialog box 3 Select the group and click OK In this example the group is Seismic grp 4 Click on the first clip in the clip list 5 Click Play to start playing the clip list Editing a Clip List To edit a clip list group of clips 1 Click a panel to select it 2 Choose Video Clip Load Group if the clip list to be edited was previously saved as a group Select the group and click OK 3 Choose VideoClip Edit Clip List to open the Edit Clip List dialog box Profile Family 199 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Edit Clip List Ea Drive Clip list fINTI default INT1 default Richter Clips INT1 defaultferuption INT1 default magma Add gt INT1 default Tidal Wave Intuition bado INT1 defaultfvolcano magma Nuance Remove Richter Tidal Wave volcano OK Cancel Figure 99 Edit Clip List dialog box 4 To add a clip to the current list loaded in step 1 select a clip in the Clips box and then click Add It is added to the Clip List box with a long clip name 5 To remove a clip from the current list select a clip from the Clip List box and click Remove to remove the clip from the list This does not delete the clip from disk it simply removes a reference from the clip list 6 To edit a different group click Add Group to bring up the Load Group of Clips dialog box 7 Click OK when complete Setting In and Out Marks in Clips Y
24. Ch 11 AES EBU Ou1 J12 Ch 12 AES EBU Out1 2 12 4 Gia Help Figure 39 Digital Audio Output dialog box 2 Click in the box of the output channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 3 After you have changed the channel name or names click Close 92 Profile Family Audio Configuration for the PDR200 Audio Configuration for the PDR200 The Audio Configuration dialog box shown in Figure 40 allows you to configure input and output channels input clocking audio quality and monitor channels Input and Output Mapping The Input Mapping tab is used for mapping input sources to Profile channels while the Output Mapping tab is used for mapping Profile channels to output destinations For example you can map Profile Audio Chassis PAC input sources and serial digital audio input sources Figure 40 and Figure 41 illustrate a sample configuration a Profile unit with an audio signal processing board a PAC 208 chassis with A D and D A convertors and connectors for eight channels and two serial digital cards providing eight analog audio channels eight digital audio channels and four video channels with 16 embedded audio channels each Audio Signal Processing Board 1 J6 x Input Mapping Input Clocking Output Mapping Monitor Channels InA J6 InA J6 InA J5 InB J5 Cl Input13 E Input 14 Input 15 h 18 Input 15 Ci Figure 40 Audio C
25. Component Video Input dialog box The current status indicators shown at the top of the dialog box are Video Present VITC Present and Auto Timed The green light indicates that a particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited To configure analog component video input 1 Select Video Input from the configuration tree and then click or double click an analog component input from the list such as CAV InA J9 The Analog Component Video Input CAV dialog box Figure 18 Analog Component Video Input J9 CAV InA J9 Figure 18 Component Analog Video Input dialog box CAV 2 If you prefer enter the new name in the Name box For example if the signal is a Betacam input you could rename it to Betacam 1 The VITC name window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 62 Profile Family 11 Analog Component Video Input Under Overwritable Video Standard click either 525 Video Standard or 625 Video Standard If you change this standard you must restart all tools that use this channel The video input board can serve both standards but the input can only accept one at a time Select a VITC reader setting If you to use Automatic VITC Detect the disk recorder uses the range set in the F
26. I INT or just The final examples lists all movies in INT default on Profile1 listnames r PROFILE1 I INT default 250 Profile Family Using the Listnames and Copymovie Commands The copymovie utility copies media between two Profiles using the Fibre Channel network The parameters to this utility are case sensitive The command is issued in the form copymovie srcMachine srcName destMachine destName There are four arguments srcMachine for the Profile machine where the source media is located use an asterisk to specify the local machine srcName for the source name of the media destMachine for the Profile machine where you want copy to go use an asterisk to specify the local machine destName is the name of the destination media This example copies media called INT default movie1 from PROFILE1 to PROFILE2 where it will be named INT default movie2 copymovie Profile3 INT default movie1 Profile4 INT default movie2 This example copies media called INT default movie1 from PROFILE1 to the local Profile where the command was run where it is named INT default movie7 copymovie PROFILE1 INT default movie1 INT default movie7 Profile Family 251 T Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking The PDR Network Configuration Service The PDR Network Configuration service fences collects information about other PDRs on the network via multicast and maintains a local table of the informati
27. If you stop the automatic log in or if it fails the Windows NT log in dialog box appears When logging in remember that this dialog box is case sensitive To manually log in 1 At the Windows NT 4 0 log in window enter the username profile However you must log in as administrator when installing software performing Windows NT administration starting a service or setting an Ethernet IP address Use the Tab key to advance to the password field The password appears as asterisks for password security For the password enter profile Use the Tab key to advance to the From field If your domain name or local computer name is not displayed in the box click in the box to access a list of choices Select your domain or local computer name from the list Click OK or press Enter NOTE If a log in error message appears and all the information is correct try deleting the password and clicking OK Profile Family Starting and Closing Profile Applications Starting and Closing Profile Applications After logging into your Profile system you see shortcut icons for the Profile applications on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop Figure 2 PDR Application shortcuts on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop Profile Family 31 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family Starting an Application To start a Profile application V drPanel in these examples using Windows NT 4 0 Double click the shortcut ico
28. Loop Play 268 Louth 28 162 LTC 27 50 177 178 331 373 Luminance Black Clip Level 69 Luminance Only 68 Luminance White Clip Level 69 Mainframe bandwidth 23 Manual conventions 19 Manually logging in 30 Marks 164 184 200 Master adding media to 275 creating 275 delete 122 playing 276 renaming 121 Master List 287 Master timecode 41 Master VITC 41 Max Chroma 169 Media cleaning up trimmed clips 269 sorting 259 Media files 373 sorting 259 Media Manager 33 105 158 archiving a bin or clip 137 copying and pasting media 116 creating renaming deleting bins 120 deleting an archived clip 140 deleting clips and masters 122 duplicating media 120 emptying recycle bin 122 exporting a cartridge 142 formatting cartridges 147 icons 113 importing a cartridge 140 inventorying the Library 146 library cartridge and clip properties Index 150 moving media 117 renaming an archived clip 139 renaming clips and masters 121 restoring a bin or clip from archive 138 starting and exiting 106 tape transport status 153 toolbar 115 Tools menu 108 Transfer Monitor 156 updating and inventorying cartridges 144 using a Library System 137 155 viewing properties 124 127 viewing the hierarchy 112 Media properties 124 262 Memory 373 Menu 19 373 Meters audio 277 Microcode 207 239 Microphone 253 Min Lum Q 169 Modify Mark In button 265 Modify Mark Out button 265 Monitor 374 selecting 287 Monitor Channels 100 Monitor out
29. Renaming Clips and Masters A clip or master can have a name up to 32 characters long Spaces are legal characters but count for two characters Colons and slashes are illegal in clip and master names Tildes are only illegal as first characters To rename a clip or master 1 Select the clip or master in the contents pane 23 Choose Rename on the File menu or with a right click You can also select the item a second time The name of the clip or master is highlighted Type a new name for the clip or master and press Enter Profile Family 121 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Deleting Clips and Masters When a clip or master is deleted it is just moved to the Recycle bin It is permanently deleted when the Recycle bin is emptied To delete a clip or master 1 Select the clip or master in the contents pane 2 Press Delete Backspace or choose Delete on the File menu or from the shortcut menu with the right click Press Shift Delete to skip the Recycle bin and delete the material immediately 3 The clip or master icon disappears from the tree and is moved to the Recycle bin Emptying the Recycle Bin When a clip or master is deleted it is moved to the Recycle bin and is permanently deleted when the Recycle bin is emptied If an item of the same name is in the Recycle bin the new item is automatically renamed To empty the Recycle bin 1 Select the bin labeled Recycled in the tree pane
30. Valid audio channels for the current channel will have record selector buttons containing a channel number To enable a channel for recording place the mouse pointer over the record selector button and click on it with the left mouse button The audio fader lets you adjust the audio input and output levels of the currently selected channel If more than one audio channel is selected for gain adjustment the fader level reflects the highest gain level of the selected audio channels The decibel level window above the fader also displays the fader s current decibel level The input and output gain levels of each channel may be adjusted also To select an audio channel for gain adjustment place the mouse pointer over any part of the channel s meter section Click the left button to select the channel The meter section is highlighted Below the audio gain displays is the audio control toolbar which has the following buttons Unity Sets all audio levels to the unity level O dB 4 0 To set unity the audio meter must be selected and the input or output gain adjustment button must be selected Input gain adjustment mode This button activates the input level arrow left side for fader adjustments Output gain adjustment mode This button activates the output level arrow right side for fader adjustments Scale adjustment increase decrease These buttons zoom in or zoom out on the audio display scale in the range of 6 to 6
31. or click Help for context sensitive Help To configure digital audio input 1 Expand Audio Input and then click one of the Digital Channels to bring up the Digital Audio Input dialog box Figure 33 The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical input connectors on the audio input box Ch 01 and Ch 02 refer to the channel pair on the first connector and Ch 03 and Ch 04 refer to the pair on the second connector and so forth Digital Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 9 12 AES EBU In8 J12 AES EBU In10 J12 AES EBU In11 J12 AES EBU In12 J12 Figure 33 Digital Audio Input dialog box Main tab 2 Click the Main tab if it is not already visible 3 Click in the box of the input channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 4 After you have changed the channel name or names click Close or another tab 86 Profile Family Digital Audio Input To check the status of digital input channels 1 In the Digital Audio Input dialog box click the Status tab Under Status Indicators you see the error status of each channel If a channel has an error the indicator is on See Table 2 for a description of each error indicator Digital Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 9 12 Figure 34 Digital Audio Input dialog box Status tab 2 When you are done checking for errors click Close or another tab Table 2 Digital audio input channel indicators Indicato
32. then click Control Panel 3 Double click the Network icon 4 Click TCP IP then Properties 5 Click Specify IP Address For PROFILE1 set the address for example to 192 168 99 1 6 Click OK Profile Family 243 T Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up You can set up your Fibre Channel network in one of two ways Through the Fibre Channel dialog box in the Configuration Manager graphical user interface For instructions on how to do this refer to Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking on page 102 With the fcconfig command To set up Fibre Channel with fcconfig 1 Open a MS DOS command window and type fcconfig followed by Enter The following information is displayed Fibre Channel Network Configuration EC IP AddEG6SS ecco s Y MOL set Hardware Address 0 TCP UDP checksums Enabled Multicast s Disabled Auto host table administration Enabled F C Switch Disabled You need to set the IP address the IP subnet mask the hardware address and turn off TCP checksums and auto host table administration By turning off TCP checksums you maximize bandwidth but you will not be able to detect data corruption You turn auto host table administration table if you do not intend to use fcncs see The PDR Network Configuration Service on page 252 2 Type fcconfig followed by Enter The f
33. 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The Record operation will automatically stop at the specified timecode thus protecting disk storage space The Bounce button plays the selected clip or clip list continuously until at the end of the clip it plays the clip in reverse or in the case of a clip list it plays to the end of the clip list then reverses the sequence playing all the clips in reverse order If you create a clip while in Bounce mode you are asked to enter a clip length in the form 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The Record operation will automatically stop at the specified timecode thus protecting disk storage space The PB EE Playback E to E button determines the action during Stop or Record If you select Playback the recorded image is displayed as a still during Stop and audio is silenced If E to E is selected the input signal is routed through to the display during Stop or Record Profile Family 183 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 184 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2 The Clip Position Bar displays the relative position of the current frame within the current clip For example if the Clip Position Bar is to the far left the frame is at the beginning of the clip if itis at the far right the frame is at the end Click on the bar to activate it or press j or The Remove In Mark button removes the in mark and restores the clip to its first available field The Set In Mark
34. 1 Click in the edit timeline to make it active 1 Select a clip or master in the current bin 2 Choose Insert from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Insert Media button on the current bin toolbar 3 The media is loaded onto the edit timeline You can also drag and drop a clip or master onto the edit timeline To drag and drop media to the edit timeline 1 Select a master or clip in the current bin by pressing the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the desired clip and hold the button down 2 Drag the master to the edit timeline and release the mouse button 3 Fach is inserted into the new master at the closest cursor location After insertion the time cursor automatically moves to the last frame of the new material Profile Family 275 T Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Playing a Master Now that you have created a new master you can play it or any other master using the edit timeline 1 Select the master you want to play in the current bin 2 Choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click on the Load button on the current bin toolbar The master is loaded onto the edit timeline and the timeline is made active 3 Click on the Play button You can also drag and drop a master onto the empty edit timeline To drag and drop a master 1 Select a master by pressing the left mouse button while th
35. 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Properties dialog box cesse ERR RR RE KA BAONG NAG OXON RO NGANGA ne 262 Capture timeline n cde pesi DURITIA dnb PoE aed queda rug qud 264 Timecode entry window 0 RR 266 E t0 E DUMON os Pek bebe Re memes ecu e Le le KAL BENG DAGA 266 Record buttons s aes e Ren rr m Pee RO Erw RP X Ra Rea RIA eT ANE En 266 Clip Name text Dox zio rasi iieaoe rami eae mtem Rue eI RR Eie rie RU bob oo 267 Transport controls scs rx RE Rn GG Ae n ak Ra RUN ee NG 267 Record Buffer dialog box 0 2 0 0 ne 268 Create and User Mark buttons plus event and frame controls 270 Edit timellrne necis hix nona RR ERRARE RERAXRMEESELET EE LE AS E 273 Trim handles on the edit timeline l l 274 Audio controls AA 277 List Manager wIndOoW e mie iad P RASON AAP RD Ree LY v ada URS 283 Hardware Communication Monitor message DOxX 0 0 eee eee 284 Remote Machine dialog box llle 286 A basic playback list lel III 288 Play event properties dialog box see 289 Creating a play event m nh 294 Creating a record event A e ne 295 New Switch Event dialog box IIIA 297 New Transfer Event dialog box e 298 New Transfer Event dialog Dox 2 0 ee 299 New Listdlalog OX sser corru Rb AA REG XE RUPEE EM
36. 2 Choose Empty Recycle Bin with a right click or from the File menu To always delete media immediately avoiding the Recycle bin 1 Select the bin labeled Recycled in the tree pane 2 Choose Properties with the right click or from the File menu The Recycle Bin Properties dialog box appears see Figure 52 3 Click the Options check box to enable immediate removal of deleted items 4 Click OK 122 Profile Family Emptying the Recycle Bin Figure 52 Recycle Bin properties dialog box Profile Family 123 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Viewing Properties Media Manager lets you view the properties of a volume media properties for clips and masters and properties for a library system see Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties on page 150 To view volume properties 1 Select a volume in the tree pane ei 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The Properties dialog box for volumes appears see Figure 53 Figure 53 Properties dialog box for volumes 124 Profile Family Viewing Properties To view media properties 1 Select a clip or master in the contents bin Ej 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The Properties dialog box for clips or masters appears see Figure 5
37. 20 eee eee eee 325 Configuring Audio Resources 000 cee eee eee 327 Audio Window Setup 0 00 eese 329 Configuring Timecode Resources cece eee 330 Choosing Timecode Codecs aaa 332 Timecode Generator Settings 334 Resolving Resource Conflicts 0 0 00 0 e eee eee 335 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Getting Started with TimeDelay 0 0c eee eee 340 Working With the TimeDelay Project 0 341 Saving a TimeDelay Project nauan eee eee 341 Opening an Existing Project 0 20 eae eee ee 341 Launching a Project at Start up 2 000 342 Copying Project Files Between Machines 342 Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit 343 Changing the Remote Connection 00 5 344 Adding Names to the Network Host List 344 Removing Names from the Network Host List 345 Avoiding a Connection Change eae eee 345 Configuring Channels with Resource Manager 346 Adding a Playback Channel a 346 Deleting a Playback Channel lille 346 Changing a Panel s Name 0 2 348 Modifying a Channel s Configuration 348 Handling Resource Allocation Errors 349 Profile Family 9 T Contents Starting the TimeDelay Process silere 350 Manua
38. 329 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Configuring Timecode Resources To configure timecode resources 1 Click on a Track icon under the Timecode icon in the configuration tree and with the Crosspoints button clicked the Timecode Input and Output check boxes appear at the bottom of the Resource Manager dialog box see Figure 161 Resource Manager B010278 88 Channel amp Video SDIMITClntall4 SDIVITCInBJ14 SDIMTCAnAJ15 is M SDIMITC InBJ15 zi Figure 161 Timecode Input and Output check boxes 330 Profile Family Configuring Timecode Resources 2 To add a timecode track click the Add Track button In the Add Track dialog box that appears see Figure 162 click Timecode then click Add The new timecode track icon will appear in the configuration tree Add Track x Tee Add track of type C Video C Audio Timecode 7 Cancel Help Figure 162 Add Track dialog box for timecode 3 Select a timecode input under Timecode Input You can record timecode from an internal generator genlock VITC LTC inputs or a VITC input from a Profile video input 4 Select a timecode output under Timecode Output The default timecode output is None You can choose either a VITC output from a Profile video output or an LTC output NOTE VITC outputs appear in the Timecode Output list box only if the corresponding video outputs have been selected for the same channel For example SDI VITC OutA J6
39. A prompt appears requesting that you physically remove the cartridge from the library Once the robot is in position and you remove the cartridge press any button on the library s control panel 6 The Exporting Cartridge dialog box remains on the screen until the robot ejects the cartridge Since this is done in the background click OK at any time If you are using a PLS20 you must manually remove the cartridge from the drive Profile Family 143 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager 144 Updating and Inventorying Cartridges gt gt gt Using the Media Manager to archive delete or rename bins or clips simply updates the library database not the cartridge directory This is why delete and rename operations are so fast the cartridge is not loaded into a transport Archive operations do copy data to a cartridge but the cartridge directory is not updated Once a bin or clip is archived deleted or renamed the library database and the cartridge s physical directory are out of synch The update and inventory operations allow you to resynchronize the cartridge directory and library database The update operation rewrites the cartridge directory with the library database s record of what should be on that cartridge Conversely the inventory operation reads the cartridge directory and rewrites the library database s entry for that cartridge CAUTION It is very important that you update a cartridge before you inventory the car
40. Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility NOTE If you use the PDX103 Disk Expansion Unit with a PDR200 or PDR300 the 9 gigabyte hard drives in the video disk recorder are limited to the storage size of the 4 gigabyte hard drives in the PDX 103 Creating a File System A file system is created for all media disks before a Profile disk recorder is shipped from the factory You can set up a file system any time you need to build or rebuild your system NOTE If you are upgrading a PDR 100 to version 2 1 or later of system software from version 1 4 XX or earlier you must rebuild your file system Information on the disks is shown in the upper left panel of the Profile Disk Utility window information such as physical volumes data sets number of disks and disk size Additional information is shown in the lower pane SCSI IDs of each disk serial numbers vendor names number of blocks block sizes model numbers revision numbers bad blocks medium errors read errors and write errors A volume consists of a set of physical disks such as an array of eight internal disks in a Profile disk recorder or in a PDX 208 Disk Expansion Chassis A data set is a group of disks that can consist of one or more volumes The data set name is the name that appears in VdrPanel Media is striped across all disks in the data set To create a file system 1 Select a data set from the Current Data Set box For example Data Set 1 int 2 Select t
41. Ctrl click to add an event to the selection Shift click to select a range of events 2 Delete the event or events using Ctrl X or Edit Cut or the Delete key You can also choose Delete from the shortcut menu with a right click 3 Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the event Profile Family 301 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Using the Edit Window You can use the Edit window to build lists in exactly the same way as you did in the Monitor view The lists you build in the Edit window will not be scheduled until you choose the Edit Schedule List command from the Edit menu The Edit window allows you to create and store lists that you want to reuse By saving your lists you can use them on a daily or weekly basis without having to rebuild the list each time For example you may want to use this for inserting commercials in network feeds Creating a New List To create a new list 1 Choose File New and the New List dialog box appears Please choose a name for the new list Figure 143 New List dialog box 2 Enter a name for the list Click OK to save the new list Saving a List You must save a list to your system s hard disk if you want to use it at a later date To save the list 1 Choose File Save As 2 Enter a different name for the list Click OK to save the list 302 Profile Family Reusing a List Reusing a List There are two ways to reuse a list that you created earlier
42. E mode NOTE If you select auto timing for an input signal and it cannot auto time with the genlock reference signal the input signal is not recorded accurately If you must record an input that cannot lock disable auto timing and then record There may be problems if you are operating in E to E mode but the clip plays back correctly timed If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on Also for serial digital component input Line 1 can still be adjusted but Line 2 is always equal to Line 1 14 Profile Family 47 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Setting the Reference Genlock The Reference Genlock dialog box sets the genlock parameters for VITC reader settings and internal reference timing At the top of the dialog box the status indicators display the current status of the genlock input Locked to External Reference Internal Clock Locked and VITC Present green light indicates that a particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited To change the reference genlock settings 1 Click or double click Genlock from the configuration tree and the Reference Genlock dialog box appears see Figure 9 Reference Genlock Figure 9 Reference Genlock dialog box 2 Click Automatic VITC Detect to have the Profile disk recorder use the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC vertical interval timecode
43. Options menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click If a conflict arises the word Error appears in the Status left most column next to an invalid event Three errors are at the root The media does not exist As a solution bring in the correct media or verify that the name is correct There is a conflict for a channel resource For example a channel resource would generate an error if it is scheduled for use at the same time by two or more events To solve this problem change the events so that they don t attempt to use the resource at the same time The media is not long enough that is the media is shorter than the duration of the event To fix this shorten the duration of the event to match the media Profile Family 293 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Scheduling a New Play Event Another way to add events to a list is to open the New Play Event dialog box and enter the properties of the new event in the edit boxes 1 Open the list to which you are adding the play event 2 Choose File New Event Play to open the New Play Event dialog box as shown in Figure 138 3 Fill in the edit boxes with the various event properties If you select one of the repeat options you ll need to enter time and date settings 4 Click OK to close the dialog box and enter the new play event in the list New Play Event x Clip Name Stat Time 14374611 Duration 0545342 Type absolute Stat Date 11 17 1998 C
44. Properties dialog box for the library ills 150 Properties dialog box for a cartridge eese 151 Properties dialog box for an archived clip cece eee eee 152 Tape Transport Status dialog box en 153 Add Tape Transport dialog box tees 155 Transfer Monitor dialog box I 156 VdrPanel WIndoW oskerik ribi seen aber eee ae ata eh ase a i RR 161 Controller Setup dialog box 1 ete ee 162 Comm Port dialog BOX kana KNA sea ek EE RR IR eed acd Rae Ri 163 Set Clip Marks dialog box s is steiere areo ta ae a teenies 164 Profile Options dialog DOX 1 ee tte IIIA 166 Profile Family 81 Profile Options dialog box BVW insert edit only a 167 82 Edit Compression Presets dialog box eese 171 83 Vertical Blanking Interval Storage dialog box eese 172 84 Video Crosspoint dialog box II 176 85 Timecode Setup dialog box ne 177 86 Timecode Crosspoint dialog boX lsseeeee e 179 87 Paneldialog box sive ee a eae Ed XA ER EE UE aenea 181 88 Open Panel dialog box n 187 89 Message box showing record capacity 0 eee eee 188 90 Audio Monitor dialog box eR IH 189 91 New Clip dialog BOX ae p rre ve ER EY S 191 92 Load Clip dialog box t e cm tere eR NAP REED 193 93 Rename Video Clip dialog box IIR 194 94 Set Clip Protection dialog box 2 ce Ih 195 95 Stripe Timecode di
45. See Cartridge Tape Text insertion point The I shaped pointer which appears in a text input area Clicking the mouse in a text input area causes the text cursor to appear in that area Whatever information you type on the keyboard appears in the text input area displaying the text cursor Timecode Source LTC VITC Timecode generator TimeDelay The name of the application and the amount of time that elapses between the start of the record channel and the start of the playback channel Tool Tips A tool tip is a small pop up window that displays a single line of text describing the purpose of a control in a window A tool tip is hidden most of the time appearing only when the user puts the cursor on a tool and leaves it there for approximately one half second The tool tip appears near the cursor and disappears when the user clicks a mouse button or moves the pointer off of the tool Tracks Clips and masters are made up of individual tracks A clip may consist of any combination of a video track timecode track and up to 16 audio tracks A master may consist of any combination of a timecode track 0 4 video tracks and 0 16 audio tracks Trimming Shortening an originally recorded media file to a desired duration using the In and Out marks Material beyond the In and Out points is removed from the volume unless it is used in another clip or master 378 Profile Family Glossary Video interface The link to or from the inte
46. Setting dialog box you can conveniently view and change VITC settings for genlock and all available inputs and outputs To set the master timecode VITC settings 1 Choose Option Master Timecode or click the Master Timecode button on the toolbar The Master VITC Setting dialog box appears Figure 6 Master VITC Setting nput Timecode Composite InA J5 Composite InA J SDHnA J13 SDHnB J13 E Output Timecode Compasite Outa J11 Composite OutB J11 Composite OutC J11 Composite OutD J11 SDl OutA J13 SDFOutB J13 close Undo Help Figure 6 Master Timecode dialog box genlock settings Profile Family 41 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 42 The VITC Present status indicator should be on green if VITC is present If VITC Present is not on use one of the following options 2Manual VITC detection four channel LTC version of the reference genlock board Verify Automatic VITC detect is not selected If it is click to toggle it Set VITC Reader Linel to the expected location of the first Reader Line and VITC Reader Line2 to the second expected Reader Line If you only have one VITC line enter the same value on both Reader lines Check VITC Present If it is still not on use a waveform monitor to check the genlock signal to make sure that VITC exists on these lines Automatic VITC detection only Verify Automatic VITC detect is selected I
47. Start Time Duration and Comment columns are displayed You can add columns for Action Event Number Parent Event Type and Date You can also make a column as wide or as narrow as you want or make it disappear completely You can move one or several columns to the left or right to arrange them in an order that you find more convenient To add a column to a list display 1 Choose View Columns and Columns dialog box Figure 146 Awailable Columns Displayed Columns OK Action d Event Number ele Parent Event Type Remave lt lt Date Duration Comment Reset Uk star Tine Cancel Moveup Move Down Figure 146 Columns dialog box 2 Click on a column label in the Available Columns box 3 Click Add The column label moves to the Displayed Columns box 4 To change the order of the columns click a column label in the Displayed Columns box then click Move Up or Move Down 5 To return the columns to their original settings click Reset 6 Click OK when done 310 Profile Family 4 Customizing Your List Display To adjust the size of a column 1 Position the mouse pointer over the right border of the column title of the column you wish to adjust The pointer changes to a sizing shape Drag the border to the right to widen the column to the left to make the column narrower Drop the border at the desired column width Drag the right border completely to the left to red
48. Tool Tip message Profile Family 337 T Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager 338 Profile Family Chapter 1 1 Using TimeDelay TimeDelay is a Profile application that enables you to record incoming video audio or both and to delay the playback for a specific period of time While TimeDelay can be used in combination with other applications like Media Manager Tool Box Editor VDR Panel and others it is primarily intended for users who will dedicate all of a Profile system s resources to one or more instances of the TimeDelay application This chapter provides information about TimeDelay version 2 0 which is supported by Profile system software version 2 5 and higher In this chapter you find three major sections Getting Started with TimeDelay describes how to launch TimeDelay describes the TimeDelay project file and describes how to use Resource Manager to configure TimeDelay channels Starting the TimeDelay Process explains how to start the TimeDelay process either manually or automatically and provides instructions for and details about the various settings you need to make Using the Interface this is a reference section that describes each of the controls in the Record and Playback panels and each of the menu items in the File View and Config menus Profile Family 339 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Getting Started with TimeDelay Here are two different methods that you can use to launch Time
49. Urda Help Figure 44 System Audio Configuration dialog box 2 By default recording and playback are set to 16 bit quality To change the audio quality click the 20 bit button for either recording playback or both Audio is played back at its recorded resolution even if the system is configured for 20 bit playback quality If 16 bit quality is enabled all audio will be played back at 16 bit regardless of what quality it was recorded in 3 Click Enabled under Scrubbing to turn audio scrubbing on and click Disabled to turn it off Disabled is the default 4 Click Undo to return the settings in the dialog box 5 Click Close when finished Profile Family 101 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking Ka 102 Profile Family If you have a Fibre Channel board in your Profile unit and you are part of a Fibre Channel Profile network you must configure the board with an IP Internet Protocol address and other optional settings Configuration Manager allows you to do this with the Fibre Channel Networking command To configure your Fibre Channel board 1 Choose Option Fibre Channel Networking or click the Fibre Channel Networking button on the toolbar The Fibre Channel dialog box appears see Figure 45 Fibre Channel Network Configuration Dl x IP Address Ask your network administrator to assign an IP address for your Fibre Channel Interface and enter it belo
50. VdrPanel Record Clips First To define a clip by recording and then naming the clip 1 2 9 Click a panel to select it If any clips are listed in the Clips box choose VideoClip Eject All Clips to clear the clip list Click the Record button in the selected Panel dialog box to begin recording A clip named 1 or other number for a unique clip name appears in the clip list for the panel If you are in Loop or Bounce mode the clip is limited in size to either 1 000 fields or to the last clip length specified in the Loop Bounce Length dialog box Click Stop to stop recording If you repeat these steps to record additional clips they are named sequentially one higher than the previous clip For example 2 3 and so forth Choose VideoClip Rename Clip to open the Rename Video Clip dialog box see Renaming a Clip on page 194 Click on the clip to be renamed such as 1 Enter the new name in the To field Spaces and uppercase characters are acceptable however uppercase and lowercase characters will not distiguish clip names Click OK Loading and Playing a Clip To load and play a clip 1 2 3 Click in a panel to select it If the clip is already loaded select it from the Clips box and go to step 7 If the clip is not loaded choose VideoClip Load Clip to open the Load Clip dialog box If theclip you wantto load is on a different drive select a different disk
51. Window c satsi cheer RE ERE RR FRE RR eR E DR LA x DR Eun 340 170 The Remote Connection dialog box eee 343 171 The Add Network Host dialog box e 344 172 The Resource Manager dialog box 1 cee eee 347 173 Warning dialog box e m 349 174 The Auto Start dialog box 1 n 351 175 TimeDelay Buffer Location dialog boxX cece eee 352 176 The Select Timecode Source dialog box 0 a 356 177 The audio level controls cette 358 178 Two column display a a EG RR Rh RH Rer yh e S 362 Profile Family Contents 15 T Contents 16 Tables ONOaRWND E Ll ll 2 ll t OANOoaRWNMD O PDR100 and PDR200 300 features compared 00 0 ee eee eee ees 23 Digital audio input channel indicators 00 eee eee 87 Board representation key llli ete eee 97 Configuration example two video input clocking sources 97 Configuration example four video input clocking sources 98 JPEG video quality compression 00 000 eee ete 132 MPEG Video quality compression ssseesee eee 133 Factory set values for JPEG compression presets 168 Factory set values for MPEG compression presets 20 0 005 170 VdrPanel shortcut keys llle 186 Microcode update files llle 207 MPEG Encoder Parameters eee 224 Audio Parameters xdg E NAA
52. You can also drag the Shuttle Bar to a desired position If the shuttle rate is set faster than the maximum rate for the controller the maximum rate is displayed Shuttle Rate Enter rate URIIITH 28 The Clip Name box lists the names of the clips in the current clip list Profile Family 185 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel The functions on the Panel dialog box can be accessed directly by clicking on the appropriate button with the mouse or by using the shortcut keys shown in Table 10 For example pressing Shift R starts recording in the active panel Table 10 VdrPanel shortcut keys Shortcut Key Function Shortcut Key Function Shift R Record Ctrl gt Forward 100 Fields w Rewind Ctrl Back 100 Fields S Stop jor J Jog controls por Play e Go to Clip End f Fast Forward h Shuttle controls spacebar Stop t Go to Clip Beginning Ctrl AthruH Activate panel A thru H i Set Mark In gt Forward 1 Field e Set Mark Out not zero e Back 1 Field c Trim to Mark In Shift Forward 10 Fields u Trim from Mark Out Shift Back 10 Fields F1 Start Help Opening a Panel 186 If none of the panels are visible here are the steps to open a panel 1 Choose Window Open Panel The Open a Panel dialog box appears Figure 88 Profile Family Making a Panel Active Open a Panel x Cancel Figure 88 Open Panel dialog box
53. and reference information about using the application The manual and the Help window it is displayed in follow the Microsoft standard Hertz Hz Hertz is the unit of frequency named after the physicist Heinrich Hertz 1857 1894 One hertz Hz is equal to 1 cycle second Hue A term that describes a color family for example red or yellow Hue is a polar coordinate that is it moves in a circular motion around the color spectrum and ranges from 0 to 360 with O being red Hue is measured in degrees See Chroma I frame MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is it reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame It does so by relying on a GOP A GOP is composed of I frames B pictures and P pictures An I frame or I picture is analogous to a JPEG frame in that it is a self contained picture It does not use motion vectors as do the B picture and P picture See B Picture P Picture Input device A device that allows you to send information to a software application Typical input devices include keyboards mice tablets and trackballs See Pointer and Pointing Device 372 Profile Family Glossary Insert record mode In insert record mode audio and video material can be recorded independently New material can replace existing material anywhere in the program Insert record mode requires timecode on the destination Interface A common connection that is used fo
54. as it passes through the Profile unit you must set a corresponding delay on the playback The E to E Timed Output option sets a 16 line delay on all the system outputs allowing a zero timed input to be exactly timed with a play to air signal To set all your Profile unit output for E to E operations 1 Choose Option System Timing or click the System Timing button on the toolbar The System Timing dialog box appears 2 Click E to E Timed Output 3 Click Close System Timing x Ext Ref Line 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 121314 15 Bj Internal Ref Genlock Input J5 J7 Input J13 J13 Input J9 Composite OutA J11 Bj Composite OutB J11 JJ Composite OutC J11 BJ Composite OutD J11 J SD OutA J13 JJ SD OutB J13 2 F Composite OutA J11 Timing Mode Ve Ce RN OCCUR CUR UO NINE AS C Zero Timed Output Eto E Timed Output er Line Coarse Fine fe d E jo Indi Defaut Figure 8 System Timing dialog box E to E timed 46 Profile Family Adjusting the Timing when Upgrading to 2 5 Adjusting the Timing when Upgrading to 2 5 If you are upgrading an existing PDR 100 to system software version 2 5 your system timing will be left in E to E mode and no changes will be made to your system timing The only difference you will see is a numeric offset of 7 lines in the Line setting under Reference Genlock System Input Advanced Adjustment in the Refere
55. button sets the in mark for the current clip at the current timecode you can also press i When the clip is played it starts at the in mark instead of the clip beginning however the portion before the in mark is not lost Use Remove In Mark to remove the in mark The in mark only affects this instance of the clip If the clip repeats in the clip list or is used by another panel this in mark is not automatically present The Trim to In Mark button removes the portion of the current clip preceding the in mark you can also press c This action affects all copies of this clip on all panels The trimmed material is not retrievable A warning message and verification prompt are displayed before the material is trimmed The Trim from Out Mark button removes the portion of the current clip following the out mark you can also press u This action affects all copies of this clip on all panels The trimmed material is not retrievable A warning message and verification prompt are displayed before the material is trimmed The Set Out Mark button sets an out mark for the current clip at the current timecode you can also press o not zero When the clip is played it ends at the out mark however the portion after the out mark is not lost Use Remove Out Mark to remove out mark An out mark only affects this instance of the clip If the clip repeats in the clip list or is used by another panel the out mark is not automatically present The Remov
56. contains the date and time of the conversion user description target format and when applicable data rate chrominance value and GOP structure Profile Family Viewing Properties Figure 55 The transcode history page Profile Family 127 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Finding Clips and Masters You can locate clips and masters anywhere on the Profile network If you select the Profile Network icon you will search all machines and libraries on the network If you select a machine your search will be limited to that machine s volumes and attached library If you select a cartridge in a library your search includes all partitions in the cartridge 1 Select the item where you want to begin your search in either the tree or contents panes 2 Choose Find on the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Find dialog box appears see Figure 56 Find All Files x EE CO Media ony 46 TRITON12 INT1 Commercials 00 02 01 00 10 30 97 12 48 PM Figure 56 Find dialog box 128 Profile Family Finding Clips and Masters Enter the name of the clip or master in the Named box in this example 10 28 97 The Look In box indicates where the search will begin NOTE Wildcards are not supported Click Find Now Click Stop to abort the search When a match is found the result is displayed in the box at the bottom of the Find dialog box as shown in Figure 56 If you doub
57. depending on the type of track you want Click Add when done The new video track icon will appear in the configuration tree NOTE JPEG and MPEG tracks cannot be mixed Therefore before you can add an MPEG track you must remove all JPEG video tracks or before you can add a JPEG track you must remove all MPEG tracks Ter Add track of type Video MPEG C Audio JPEG MPEG C Timecode Add Cancel Help 1 Caned Hep Figure 150 Add Track dialog box for video In the Video Quality list box select a video quality if you want something P other than the default Medium The higher the quality the more disk space is used To make a custom quality setting click the button next to the Video Quality list box and the Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box appears Select either Custom1 or Custom in the Video Quality list box When selected you can change the name of a custom setting For JPEG see Figure 151 and Table 18 select a video quality with the slider For MPEG see Figure 152 and Table 19 move the diamond on the grid to change the bit rate and group of pictures GOP settings and click the button for the desired chrominance setting The High Medium Low and Draft buttons select the preset bit rates and GOP settings which can be useful as reference points when you are making a custom setting Click Undo to undo changes and click OK when done Profile Family 317 Chapter 10 Using the Resource
58. following clip even if you don t intend to play it Louth end mode ensures that after playing a clip in a list timecode freezes at the first frame of the next clip in that list NOTE Louth menu commands are available only when the panel controller is set to Louth Automation 174 Profile Family Selecting Video Crosspoints To set a panel to Louth switcher mode 1 Click the panel to activate it The panel controller must be Louth Automation For information on how to set the controller to Louth Automation see Selecting a Controller on page 161 Choose Options Louth Switcher Mode A check mark appears next to Louth Switcher Mode in the Options menu to show that it is activated To return the panel to normal mode choose Options Louth Switcher Mode again To set a panel to Louth end mode 1 Click the panel to activate it The panel controller must be Louth Automation For information on how to set the controller to Louth Automation see Selecting a Controller on page 161 Choose Options Louth End Mode A check mark appears next to Louth End Mode in the Options menu to show that it is activated To return the panel to normal mode choose Options Louth End Mode again Selecting Video Crosspoints A video crosspoint shows the connection between a video input and output with a JPEG codec MPEG encoder or MPEG decoder between Video inputs top left corner represent video input conn
59. foo min sec frm User bits 00000000 Figure 95 Stripe Timecode dialog box 2 Enter the timecode you want to start the clip with in the form 00 00 00 00 3 Enter up to eight digits to mark the clip with user bits 4 Click OK when complete Setting Long or Short Clip Names Long clip names display the full path name of the clip for example INT AdefaulAclipname Short clip names display only the clip name Clip names are shown in Clip Name box in a Panel To set the clip name to be short or long Choose Options Display Short Name or Options Display Long Name NOTE This setting only applies to the current panel Each panel can have a different setting for clip name length 196 Profile Family Ejecting All Clips Ejecting All Clips To eject all clips 1 Choose VideoClip Eject All Clips 2 All clips in the Clips box in the Panel are ejected immediately Deleting a Clip To delete a clip 1 Choose VideoClip Delete Clip to open the Delete Clip dialog box Delete Clip Drive INT1 default a Select clip s to be deleted ox ia Figure 96 Delete Clip dialog box 2 If the clip you want to delete is on a different drive select it in the Drive box 3 Select the clip or clips you want to delete 4 Click OK when complete A message box appears telling you which file is being deleted Profile Family 197 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Clip Lists You can save and or
60. inputs and outputs Timecode sources inputs and outputs Timecode codecs Operational settings include Video quality compression Field dominance Still play mode Audio window size Timecode generator settings Profile Family Configuring Resources Configuring Resources Before you can make use of a Profile application you must allocate Profile resources such as video inputs and outputs for its use These resources are assigned to channels for use by the application Once the resources are allocated they are unavailable for other applications You must manage Profile resources to ensure that each application is able to use the required resources when it needs them To gain access to Resource Manager and configure Profile resources In Tool Box Editor choose Config Resources In List Manager choose Project Configure n TimeDelay choose Config Resource Manager The Resource Manager is available when an application is running unless media is loaded on a timeline Assigning Profile Channels Your first step is to acquire one or more Profile channels The single channel tab labeled Channel A is the default You can change the name of the channel by entering a new name in the Name text box Channel names can have up to 32 characters but a shorter name is recommended for readability Depending on your system you can configure channels up to a limit set by the application however some systems only have two c
61. installed Fibre Channel as a field installation kit Configuring your system for the Fibre Channel also requires that you first configure your Ethernet LAN See the PDR200 Installation Manual or the Profile Family Local Area Network Installation Manual for more information NOTE Even an isolated Profile unit with a Fibre Channel card that is not connected to a network must be given an IP address Follow the instructions for entering an IP address under Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up on page 244 Profile Family 241 T Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Setting Up Hardware for Fibre Channel First you set up the Ethernet LAN The LAN card uses a twisted pair network scheme and so must be connected via a standard 10BaseT Ethernet hub You cannot plug one LAN card directly into another You can put Profile disk recorders onto your site s computer network if you want just as long as you are aware that it uses TCP IP Next you set up the Fibre Channel network Unlike the Ethernet LAN the Fibre Channel network will permit two machines to be plugged directly into each other More than two machines however require a Fibre Channel hub or a Fibre Channel switch NOTE The cable which connects individual machines to the Fibre Channel hub is the same cable that connects two machines together This cable comes with the Fibre Channel card However Profile Fibre Channel cables sold for use with Fibre Channel hubs do not have the req
62. machines Copying media is done in the background to allow you to continue with your work Adding to and restoring from an archive also is done in the background Since this may result in more than one transfer occurring at the same time the Transfer Monitor is used to keep track of these background tasks Each time a media transfer is started a new entry appears in the Transfer Monitor The Transfer Monitor can be opened at any time It consists of two tabs the Network tab which shows all copies over Fibre Channel and Duplicates in progress and the Library tab which shows any ongoing library transactions To track background operations with the Transfer Monitor Choose Tools Transfer Monitor or click the Profile logo on the toolbar l The Transfer Monitor dialog box appears Transfer Monitor Xx Network Library Operation Source Destination Complete Archiving PDR200_1 INT default Clp PDR200_1 Library 000152 pa Pending Cancel Archive Figure 75 Transfer Monitor dialog box 156 Profile Family Viewing the Transfer Monitor The Profile logo on the Media Manager toolbar is animated whenever there is an archive item in the Transfer Monitor whether the Transfer Monitor is open or not If there are only error items in the Transfer Monitor the error logo appears without animation The Network tab divides entries into four columns source destination percent complete and average megabytes per sec
63. may appear in this publication Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 277 7013 or in subparagraph c 1 and 2 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Manufacturer is Grass Valley Group Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 U S A Rev Date Description February 1999 Original issue Part number 071 0565 00 March 2000 Updated Profile Protocol configuration information and corporate identity Part number 071 0565 01 Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Contents Preface Aboutthis Marual 2l eR XE EE ERR RET 17 Related Documentation llle 18 Terminology and Conventions cece eee ee 19 Introducing the Profile Family A Profile System Overview 0 0 24 Video Disk Subsystem eee 24 Video Compression c cee eet eee 25 Video and Audio Interface Boards 0 00 ee eee eee 26 Profile Software Development 0 00 cee eee eee 28 What to Read First a em a Rx RA RUE RR RT RR ed 29 Starting Your Profile System e eee eee 30 Starting and Closing Profile Applications 31 Starting an Application 0 0 0 0 een 32 MG AA RR tla eR E RR RR RT CAL 32 Closing an Application llle 32 Profile Configurat
64. motion vectors to determine how a future frame will be composed See B Picture GOP I frame Protocol A set of rules that allows computers to transfer information across a network to other computers Read only memory ROM Memory that is not erased when power is turned off It is also called firmware The firmware in a computing device allows it to boot without being connected to a host computer Real time Generally considered to be 30 fps in NTSC 25 fps in PAL 24 fps for film In computer terms processing information as it becomes available rather than storing for processing at a later time Record Buffer Determines the length of the Time Delay clip that the record buffer loop records on Resource A resource is a Profile input JPEG codec or output You allocate resources for exclusive use by any application such as Tool Box Editor List Manager and VDRPanel You should free up deallocate unneeded Profile resources whenever possible to that they can be used by other applications RGB An additive method of combining percentages of red green and blue primary colors to form other colors ROM See Read Only Memory 376 Profile Family Glossary RS 232 C A standard serial communications interface for data communications commonly used for communications between a computer and modem or to control automated devices which don t have a conventional computer operating system RS 422 A standard serial comm
65. partitions select the number of seconds or minutes in the Partition Duration box Selecting Custom opens the Custom Duration box In the Custom box enter the duration of seconds in the range 1 to 9999 148 Profile Family Formatting Cartridges To set the anticipated quality of the video that you will use with these cartridges select a video quality from the Anticipated Video Quality box If you anticipate using higher video quality you will use more tape to store media This causes the format operation to create larger and fewer partitions To set the anticipated audio resolution that you plan to use with these cartridges select either 16 bits or 20 bits from the Anticipated Audio Quality box Different audio qualities affect the amount of tape used and therefore the number of partitions that will be created To allow more than one file clips under a partition click Multiple files per partition If unselected only a single clip may be archived per partition 4 Click OK Profile Family 149 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties To view the properties for the library 1 Select the library icon in the tree pane ei 2 Choose Properties either from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The library properties dialog box appears Figure 70 Properties dialog box for the library 3 Cl
66. provides two channels of both input and output plus embedded audio when used with an ASPB You can also enable dithering auto timing and automate VITC detection The board also has error detection and handling The standard reference genlock board allows you to time your Profile server to other devices in a broadcast facility You can lock a Profile unit to a PAL or NTSC reference signal house black The genlock board also lets you have LTC inputs and outputs with four inputs and four outputs possible for each channel 26 Profile Family Video and Audio Interface Boards Networking Applications Processor Digital ko Analog NG RS 422 ports 8 Subsystem Audiol O pumuwa Audiol O Ethernet LAN 1 0 Intel Pentium Processor External Chassis d EISA Bus DVCPRO MPEG MPEG Fibre Enhanced Enhanced Video I O Mix t Codec 4 2 2 11 4 2 2 Channel Slave Recorder Master Recorder Analog Composite Effects Decoder Encoder Arbitrated 2 PEG CODECs Intel i960 real time SDI w Embed Audio 35 only iiDecder Loop Ultra SCSI 2 processor Comp Analog In 2JPEG CODECs Analog Comp mon Ultra 5CSI 2 SCSI Devices 32 x 32 CCIR 601 Video Router and Clocks 9955 1 Indicates optional board Figure 1 The PDR200 300 block diagram Profile Family 27 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family Profile Software Development Th
67. storage the network connection may have gone down there may have been trouble reading an archive library cartridge An error is indicated by a change in the Profile logo Occasionally an error will occur while a transfer is in progress The destination In the Transfer Monitor entries that could not complete due to error are displayed in red and their percent complete shows Error When the entry is selected a short description of the error is shown at the bottom of the window To remove the entry select it and then click the Remove button 158 Profile Family Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Storing media on a Profile disk recorder rather than on tape opens the door to almost instant access to digital video and audio material Media is available to all of Profile s channels at once so you can play a video and audio clip on more than one channel at the same time Since each of the channels is independent playback can start at a different time and place in a clip One of the best features of the Profile system is that you can start playing material while it s still being recorded The basic element of digitally stored video and audio is the clip A clip is a reference to video audio and timecode material recorded in media files on the Profile media disks A clip has a beginning and an end and when first recorded the beginning and end correspond to the first and last frames stored in the media file but a clip may refer to the entire media
68. that application is running see Figure 165 Video Output s Figure 165 Tool Tip showing an external user When the resource is being used by the application in which you are currently working the Tool Tip simply lists the channel that is using the resource as shown in Figure 166 Video Dutput s None x SDI Dut J3 SDI QutBN3 Figure 166 Tool Tip showing an internal user When the resource is being used by an application that does not use Resource Manager such as VDR Panel the message in the Tool Tip says only In use as shown in Figure 167 Video Dutput s Figure 167 In use Tool Tip message 336 Profile Family Resolving Resource Conflicts Should the application that is using a resource shut down abnormally and release that resource while you have Resource Manager open the listing for that resource remains gray indicating that it is in use The Tool Tip displays lt Error gt as shown in Figure 168 after several seconds of delay The delay is the result of Resource Manager timing out after looking for status information that is no longer available If this message appears for a resource close and re open Resource Manager The error indication will disappear and Resource Manager should correctly indicate the status of all resources Video Dutput s bx None O SDI Qut J 1SDI DutB J3 Figure 168 lt Error gt
69. the Analog Composite Video Output dialog box 1 Select Video Output from the configuration tree and click or double click an analog composite output from the list such as Composite OutA J11 The Analog Composite Video Output dialog box appears see Figure 21 Analog Composite Video Output J11 B Composite OutB J11 Composite OutB J11 Figure 21 Analog Composite Video Output dialog box 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name For example if this is a dedicated signal to a main switcher rename it Switcher 1 The VITC Name automatically tracks the signal name and cannot be edited Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter Profile Family 67 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 3 Click VITC Generator Enable to place VITC on specified lines in the vertical interval as specified under VITC Generator Settings in analog composite video input Click NTSC with Pedestal to set the video output to NTSC with pedestal Under Timing Adjustment you can adjust the timing of the output signal to compensate for any additional delays in your system Any changes you make in this group take place immediately You can delay at the following levels to get the exact amount of delay required Vertical Line level from 2 to 148 lines Coarse Ho
70. the Communication Port dialog box see Figure 78 on page 163 Profile Family 173 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 10 Selectthe RS 422 communication port to be used for the edit controller for example P3 The Port name is the same as the name on the RS 422 breakout box 11 Click OK 12 Verify the external connections Source audio channels are connected to the inputs for the audio channels assigned as the Record Audio Audio outputs from the disk recorder are connected to the audio channels assigned as the Playback Audio Edit controller is connected to the assigned Port Refer to the device s installation manual DIP switch on the breakout box is set to Device for the RS 422 Port Refer to the breakout box installation manual NOTE Insert edits for MPEG clips using the BVW or BVW insert edit controllers are not possible unless the clip is I frame only An inset edit is accomplished by over recording previously recorded portions of video or audio material Setting Louth Modes If you use Louth Automation you can set a panel to Louth modes Normally when a clip is cued a freeze or confidence frame appears on the monitor instead of a regular video input feed In Louth switcher mode you do not see a confidence frame you see video input from the feed until you play the clip When the clip is done playing you immediately see the regular video input again Without Louth end mode you may see a few fields of a
71. the application Click on the Yes button to confirm the exit or the No button to cancel the quit command Configuring Resources You must configure video audio and timecode resources before using Tool Box Editor You configure resources with Resource Manager To start this tool Choose Config Resources For instructions on using Resource Manager see Using the Resource Manager on 313 256 Profile Family Project Files Project Files You can save your work environment into a project file tbx A project file stores allocated resources and the current bin Saving your environment eases the transition of set ups between users A descriptive project title is displayed in the title bar of the Tool Box application including the current machine name and channel A project file contains the following information for the last Profile machine connected to What the last machine was The Resource Manager configuration The current bin If you connect to a new remote Profile machine during a session the default settings for that Profile machine saved by Resource Manager are used for that machine If no defaults have been saved factory defaults are used To save the current work environment in a project file in the current working directory Choose File Save To open an existing project file Choose File Open You can also specify a project file name when you start the Tool Box Editor from a command lin
72. the better the picture detail The actual Bytes per Field depends on the picture complexity Min Lum Q and Max Chroma Q The algorithm dynamically changes Min Lum Q and Max Chroma Q to make the field size meet the target unless Fixed Q is selected Profile Family 169 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 170 Table 9 Factory set values for MPEG compression presets Preset Name Bit Rate P Pictures B Pictures Chrom Open GOP Mb sec per GOP per I P Highest quality 24 5 2 4 2 2 No Best compromise 15 5 2 4 2 2 No Most recording time 4 5 2 4 2 0 No Custom setting 4 44 2 2 4 2 0 Yes For MPEG settings Select 4 2 2 or 4 2 0 chroma sampling P per GOP is the number of P pictures predictive pictures in a group of pictures GOP B per I P is the number of B pictures bidirectionally predictive pictures for every I frame or P picture B pictures improve compression efficiency NOTE Placing zeros in both P per GOP and B per I P boxes forces pictures to be I frame only Open GOP is a group of pictures that has a B picture as its last picture type for the next I frame such as IBBPBBPBBI and so on An Open GOP depends on the next GOP s anchor to define its last B picture First encoded line is the number of first encoded line of video Lines in a 525 system are in the range 21 260 625 lines are in the range 7 310 Last encoded line is the number of the last encoded line of video
73. the destination locations reside on machines connected to the Fibre Channel network you may copy between machines Profile Family Using Paste Special 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar The bin may be pasted into the same bin it was copied from In this case the bin is automatically renamed Media Manager automatically suggests a new name that does not conflict with any other item at the selected location The new name is based on the old name with the addition of a number source becomes source 1 NOTE Copying a bin means that all clips and masters in the bin are copied to the new location Using Paste Special Paste Special is a method of pasting clips or masters that are currently on the clipboard as a result of a copy or cut operation Paste Special is enabled only when you have selected a bin on a different volume a bin on a remote machine or a partition in a library system Unlike Paste which always copies the material between a clip s mark in and out points Paste Special offers you the option of copying all the media that the clip references To use Paste Special after placing media on the clipboard choose Paste Special from the Edit menu or the right click shortcut menu When the Paste Special dialog box appears click the button for the paste option you prefer then click OK Paste Special x 22 Paste Options Ron
74. the far left side of the grid Profile Family 131 d Lj Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Custom Video Quality Settings v Unao Figure 58 JPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box Table 6 JPEG video quality compression Quality Settings Compressionin Mbps Draft 12 Low 24 Medium default 36 High 48 Custom 1 or 2 6 54 132 Profile Family Using the Transcode Utility Custom Yideo Quality Settings anag 9 o Figure 59 MPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box Table 7 MPEG Video quality compression Quality Settings Compressionin Mbps Chrominance Draft 4 4 2 0 Low 8 4 2 0 Medium default 15 4 2 2 High 24 4 2 2 Custom 1 or 2 4 44 4 2 2 Profile Family 133 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Transcode Utility CDX 03 INT 1 default ipeg4 00 00 10 25 error 45i INT 1 default mpeg6 00 00 10 23 completed gt E INT1 default tom1 00 00 18 25 2237 X Figure 60 Transcode Utility dialog box Convert tab 7 In the Preview tab select a video output for the source clip or master from the Source Video Output box This allows you to watch the source media play out on the monitor during the conversion 8 From the Target Video Output box select a video output for the target clip or master This allows you to compare video quality by watching the target media play out on a monitor
75. time This source is also used for the Seen Auto Start operation Timecode Sources GenLockVl TC In amp 4 15 Figure 176 The Select Timecode Source dialog box To select a timecode source 1 Choose Config Timecode Source to open the Select Timecode Source dialog box 2 Select the name of the appropriate timecode source from the Timecode Sources list which is drawn from the record channel s timecode sources The Buffer Position item allows you to show the record play position relative to the beginning of the record buffer 3 Click the Select button 356 Profile Family Crash Recovery Crash Recovery The Crash Recovery option adds recovery features that will restore TimeDelay to the state in which it ended When you activate Crash Recovery Time Delay periodically saves the project file This allows you to add the project file to the pdrstart bat file and fully recover from a crash when the Profile unit restarts If TimeDelay is closed or crashes while recording it will come up recording when started again TimeDelay starts recording at the first break in the timecode and resets the playbacks to their original settings Choose Config Crash Recovery to activate the crash recovery functionality A check mark next to the menu item indicates that crash recovery is activated If you have not saved the project file prior to activating Crash Recovery the Save As dialog box appears prompting you to save the
76. to an audio type analog SDI or AES EBU at all times there is no unmapped state for input mapping However channels may only be mapped to one audio type at a time Analog and AES EBU channels must always be mapped directly to the same physical channel numbers To map input channels e 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB E Configuration button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 40 2 Click the Input Mapping tab 3 Click on a button in a column This displays a list containing analog AES EBU or SDI audio groups Unavailable audio groups appear dimmed 4 Click on the group of channels you want Any single group of AES EBU channels may be mapped to any group of disk channels 5 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab Profile Family 95 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Output Mapping The Output Mapping tab is used for mapping Profile disk channels to output destinations If analog or AES EBU audio types are present they are always mapped to their associated channels These audio types cannot be unmapped Channels may be mapped to multiple audio types but of these only one can be a serial digital embedded or SDI audio type To map output channels e 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration Board 1 or 2 or click an ASPB E Configuration button The Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 41 2 Click the Ou
77. try to start an application that requires the resources being used by List Manager you ll be warned that those resources are not available You can free up those resources for use by other applications by starting the Resource Manager then setting the desired resources to None Profile Family 285 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine You can connect from your local machine to any remote Profile machine in your network A local Profile machine refers to a Profile system to which you are directly attached A remote Profile machine refers to a Profile system that is connected to your local system via an Ethernet local area network LAN To connect to a remote Profile machine 1 Choose File Remote Machine The Connect to Machine dialog box appears The label Local appears after the name of the local Profile machine Connect to Machine Machine name PROFILEB Local Cancel Figure 135 Remote Machine dialog box To connect a Profile machine from the network host list 1 Select the name of the machine in list box 2 Click Connect 3 The Connecting to Machine dialog box is displayed If the connection is unsuccessful you are given the opportunity to retry the connection or to cancel the operation NOTE To add a Profile machine to the network host list see Connecting to a Remote Machine on page 110 286 Profile Family Building a Playback List Building a Playback List List
78. via Ethernet alone La A Profile machine connected via Ethernet and Fibre Channel 9 An unconnected machine icon Appears if no connection could be made This icon cannot be expanded A non Profile server that recognizes Media Manager connection requests Media may be copied to this server from other machines on the Fibre Channel network 89 A volume A machine s storage is divided into one or more volumes The volume icon represents a physical set of disks either an internal disk set and external expansion box such as the PDX 208 or a RAID disk array PRS 200 Profile Family 113 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager 114 Profile Family A closed bin as An open bin S A Recycle bin appears below each volume 89 A master A locked master Iz Clips and archived clips with audio and video V Locked clips and archived clips with audio and video H Clips and archived clips with no audio F amp Locked clips and archived clips with no audio Clips and archived clips with audio only no video 2 Locked clips and archived clips with audio only no video An item in the Profile clip database that Media Manager does not recognize A library system appears after volumes The library icon appears only on machines connected to a Profile library system 8 A cartridge appears below the library icon 8f A cartridge that is out of the library 89 4 cleaning cartridge may appear anywhere in the
79. which the media is copied Settings Unique to Archive Events Archive events have these added settings see Scheduling an Archive Event on page 299 Media The name of the media clip that is to be archived or restored Path The name of the directory path for the media Action Click either Archive or Restore Cartridge Under Advanced Enter the bar code number for the cartridge 00000015 for example This is an optional setting Partition Under Advanced Enter the partition number where the media is archived This also is an optional setting 292 Profile Family Monitoring a List as it Runs Monitoring a List as it Runs Events you enter in the Monitor view are performed at their appointed times The current house time is displayed at the top of the window You can monitor the progress of events on each channel in the channel panels Each panel shows Air Time The timecode of the current frame of material Duration The duration of the current material Time Till Next Event This clock counts down the time until the next scheduled event The current event is highlighted in green for easy identification a cued event is highlighted in yellow Validating a List The On air List is validated automatically every few minutes You should manually check any other list to make sure that you haven t scheduled conflicting events using the same Profile resources To validate a list Choose Validate List from the
80. whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 4 After you have changed the channel names click Close or another tab 84 Profile Family Analog Audio Input To trim the line level or view overload status 1 In the Analog Audio Input dialog box click the Line Level tab Figure 32 Analog Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 1 4 Figure 32 Analog Audio Input dialog box Line Level tab 2 The line level range is 12 to 12 dB If you trim the line level for an individual channel with the slider handle the line level is incremented by 1 dB clicking on either side of the slider handle increments the line level by 0 5 dB The Level boxes show the current line level If you enter a number directly into a Level box the line level number is rounded to the nearest 0 5 dB 3 To adjust the trim for all channels at once use the Group Fader slider While the Group Fader moves all channels at once it maintains the individual channel differences 4 If a channel is overloaded the Overload indicator is on This means that the incoming audio is clipping 5 After you have adjusted the line levels click Close or another tab Profile Family 85 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Digital Audio Input In digital audio input you can change channel names check the status of channel errors and change the setting of the sample rate converter Click Undo if you want to cancel any changes
81. 000200 eee 231 Assigning an MPEG Decoder na anaana 234 PortSetVel ice mmu e e Ug tct el a ieee ds 234 PDR Access Control ees 235 Updating Firmware aiani aa Daalia Ie 237 Updating Fibre Channel Microcode esee 239 Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Setting Up Hardware for Fibre Channel 242 Setting Up Software for Fibre Channel 0n 243 Ethernet IP Address Set Up 00 243 Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up aaa 244 Enabling the Fibre Channel Switch a 246 Editing the Hosts File cece eee eee 247 Testing the Fibre Channel Network 20020005 249 Using the Listnames and Copymovie Commands 250 The PDR Network Configuration Service 5 252 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Starting and Exiting the Tool Box Editor 254 Configuring Resources 0 200 cece eee eee eee 256 Project Files 20 0 4 cnt wee KA eren AA 257 Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine 258 Selecting a Current Bin llle 259 Opening a Bin i creek Ra RE aed RE ER MR Re 261 Creating a New Bin 0 000 cece ee 261 Record Time Remaining 2 261 Renaming Media llis 261 Viewing Media Properties 0 cee eee eee 262 Deleting Media 0 cc eee ee 263 Emptying the Recycle Bin 0 liliis eere 264 Profile Family 7
82. 05 11 PM gg Master3 00 00 03 04 JPEG 03 04 98 09 48 AM 89 Masterd 00 00 10 28 JPEG 03 04 98 10 52 AM 89 Mastertom 00 00 1510 JPEG 03 04 98 09 42 AM i mpeg 00 00 10 29 MPEG 03 02 98 02 22 PM Anf Source Drfmrf427 IPFI 137012798 NA 54 PM pa Z Figure 46 Media Manager window 106 Profile Family Starting and Exiting the Media Manager To exit the Media Manager choose File Exit A message box is displayed asking you to confirm that you really want to exit the Media Manager application Click on the Yes button to confirm the exit or the No button to cancel the quit command Whenever you start the Media Manager a Hardware Communication Monitor is also started if it is not already running This program makes calls to the disk recorder and keeps track of the Profile host file profile hst which lists Profile systems on the network The Hardware Communication Monitor is normally invisible in its operation but is essential to the operation of Media Manager It appears in the Processes tab of the Windows NT Task Manager as VMHWCOM EXE ending this process will stop Media Manager as well Profile Family 107 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager 108 Starting Other Applications from the Tools Menu You can start other tools and applications from Media Manager s Tools menu Choose Tools Transfer Monitor to start the Transfer Monitor tool See Viewing the Transfer Monitor on page 156 Choose Tools Media Manager to start
83. 08 Remote Profile machine 110 Remove In Mark 184 Remove Out Mark 184 Removing a Profile machine 110 Renaming an archived clip 139 Renaming clips 194 Renaming media in Media Manager 121 Resource Manager 313 add channel 315 configuring audio resources 327 configuring timecode resources 330 remove channel 315 Resources 376 assigning 313 configuring 315 freeing 285 Resources PRC 100 217 Restoring an archived bin or clip 138 Reverse 268 Rewind 182 268 RGB 376 Right click 19 ROM 376 Router video 379 RS 232 C 377 RS 422 23 377 RS 422 protocol 212 RS 422 configuration 217 Profile Family S S N Ratio 377 Satellite feed 253 Save Group of Clips 198 Saving a list 302 saving a TimeDelay project 341 SCSI 24 377 IDs 204 log file 209 SDI 377 SECAM 377 Select timecode 177 Serial Digital Component Video Input 64 Output 74 Serial port 163 377 Service PDR Access Control 235 Set In Mark 184 Set Out Mark 184 Settings event 289 Short clip names 196 Shortcut keys VDR Panel 186 Shuttle Bar 185 Shuttle Rate 184 185 Size box 181 SMPTE 272M Level A 26 83 Software Development Kit 28 36 Sorting media files 259 Sorting media 259 Source 377 Spatial Adaptive 57 Start Time 290 Starting an application 32 Status bar 38 378 Status Bar Media Manager 109 Status column 290 Stop 182 Striping a clip 196 Subclip 270 Subnet mask 244 Switch event 297 System timing 44 System timing E to E 44 T Take button 307 T
84. 3J16 LTC Out4J16 SDI VITC Out4J14 Figure 110 The main Profile Protocol Resources dialog box 218 Using the Profile Protocol Resources Utility The Add Video Add Audio and Add Timecode buttons add the resources you select to the configuration file under construction Each time you click the Add button for a set of resources the resources are tagged as Used except for shared resources such as a Video Input which you can use several times The Clear button removes the Used tags from resources that have been added but not yet saved the Clear All button clears all Used tags in the dialog box including those for resources that have been saved The Create File button allows you to save the temporarily stored information in the permanent configuration file Resources being used by other applications such as VdrPanel are tagged as In Use If you wish to add In Use resources to the configuration file exit Profile Protocol Resources free the resources in the other Profile applications then restart Profile Protocol Resources To create a configuration file 1 Select the video input codec or encoder and video output you wish to add to the configuration file and click the Add Video button If you wish to assign more than one video codec or encoder to a channel repeat the process If you select a JPEG codec a dialog box appears similar to the one shown in Figure 111 if you select an MPEG encoder a dial
85. 4 Figure 54 Properties dialog box for clips or masters Profile Family 125 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager 126 3 Click the General tab to view these properties A preview frame of the clip or master to help identify it Preview frames are not available for MPEG masters The name of the clip or master How many tracks the clip or master uses for both audio and video he video format either NTSC or PAL NTSC clips are recorded with either drop frame or non drop frame timecode The compression format either JPEG or MPEG The length of the clip or master The length is shown in timecode format 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The size of the media in megabytes MBytes The date and time that the media was created and the date and time it was last changed The date and time the media was created or last changed is shown in the format 12 2 94 9 40 PM Month Day Year Hours Minutes AM PM 4 Click the Locked box to lock or unlock the media under Media Manager Clips and masters with the locked attribute cannot be renamed deleted or modified in any way If the Read Only Media box is checked it means that the media is protected under VdrPanel and cannot be deleted or rerecorded but you can change marks See Setting Clip Protection on page 195 5 Click the Transcode tab to view the transcode history shown in Figure 55 for the master or clip Each entry on the history page
86. 5 Scheduled connect TCRec 2 to DComponentVITClOutA Profile Family 233 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities Assigning an MPEG Decoder The previous example assigns an MPEG encoder to a video input By manually adding the following lines you can assign an MPEG decoder and connect it to a video output Manually edit these lines for Decoder 13 00 index 18 MpegDec 1 Use 13 01 for MpegDec 2 etc 18 02 CS Schedule connect MpegDec 1 to DComponentVideolOutA Play PortServer PortSever allows you to control a Profile unit remotely using Ethernet communications For example you can run PortServer on a remote Profile system so that you can access it from a local Profile using your LAN Simply double click the PortServer shortcut icon on the desktop to start it or choose Start PDR Applications PortServer The PortServer interface is shown in Figure 113 Untitled Port Server Bi CNN Figure 113 PortServer window 234 PDR Access Control PDR Access Control PDR Access Control is a Windows NT service that prevents one application from crashing another user s application by mistake Though largely transparent to users the service prevents applications from accidentally reloading the video processor while in use essentially providing a controlled gateway to the processor Applications attempting to load different video processor code than what is currently running are denied access and terminated
87. 5 PDX 103 Disk Expansion Unit Installa tion Manual 18 PDX208 Disk Expansion Chassis 204 PDX208 Disk Expansion Chassis In struction Manual 18 Peak hold 189 Physical volumes 204 Pixel 375 Play 182 268 Playback 183 375 Playback delay 375 Playing clips 193 PLS20 and PLS200 Profile Library Sys tems 105 PLS20 Library System Manual 18 PLS20 Profile Library System 137 PLS200 Library System Manual 18 PLS200 Profile Library System 137 Pointer 375 Pointing device 375 Port 163 375 PortSever 234 Powering on 30 PRC 100 configuration 217 Index PRC 100 Profile Control Panel 159 PRC100 Profile Control Panel User Manual 18 Presets 168 Profile Configuration Manager 33 37 Profile Disk Utility 34 203 Profile Log Capture Tool 214 Profile logs 36 211 capturing 214 Profile Protocol 28 36 159 Profile Protocol Resources 217 Profile System Version 2 4 Release Notes 18 profile log 211 ProLink configuration 211 217 Properties 150 262 properties media 124 Protecting clips 195 Protocol 376 PRS 200 25 PRS200 A RAID Storage Instruction Manual 18 PRS250 RAID Storage Instruction Man ual 18 R RAID 105 Read only memory 376 Real time 376 Record 182 190 295 Record Buffer 376 Record Capacity 188 Record Event 294 295 Recycle Bin 264 Profile Family 389 T Index Reference Genlock 48 Reference signals 23 Regedit registry editor 213 Regenerate timecode 178 Relocating a bad block 2
88. 51 Confirm Copy dialog box Profile Family 119 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Duplicating Media To duplicate media means that you copy a clip or master and the underlying media files that the clip or master reference A normal copy operation between locations on the same Profile machine does not copy the associated media files only references to those media files NOTE You can play clips or masters with VdrPanel or Tool Box Editor while Media Manager is duplicating the clip or master This is only practical for longer media To duplicate a clip or master 1 In the contents pane select the clip or master you want to duplicate 2 Choose Duplicate from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Duplicate operation always automatically renames the new clip Creating Renaming and Deleting Bins 120 A bin can have a name up to 32 characters long Spaces are legal characters but count for two characters Colons and slashes are illegal Tildes are illegal as a first character in a bin name To create a new bin 1 In the tree pane select the machine or volume where you want to create the new bin When a volume icon is selected the new bin is added to that volume When a machine icon is selected a new bin is created in the first volume in that machine 2 Choose New Bin from either the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click 3 A new bin called NewBin is placed in th
89. 60 Standard 625 50 Standard Preset Name Min Max Bytes Field Min Max Bytes Field Lum Q Chroma Q Lum Q Chroma Q Highest quality 0 75 60 00 100000 0 75 100 00 120000 Best compromise 0 75 60 00 75000 0 75 100 00 90000 Most recording time 0 75 60 00 50000 0 75 100 00 60000 Custom setting 5 00 5 00 5 00 5 00 Profile Family Setting Compression Presets 3 For JPEG settings Min Lum Q sets the minimum compression that can be applied to luminance in a field to meet the target data rate typically 0 75 which is also the lowest rate Max Chroma Q sets the maximum compression that can be applied to chrominance in a video field to meet the target data rate typically 60 Fixed Q sets a fixed picture quality and ignores variation in field size Use this mode for critical multigeneration work When Fixed Q is selected the other fields become fixed as Lum Q fixed luminance compression and Chroma Q fixed chrominance Q Useful starting values for Fixed Q and Chroma Q are 5 00 Verify that there is sufficient available data rate headroom before using Fixed Q mode The Bytes per Field target attempts to meet the Lum and Chroma goals With Fixed Q mode Bytes per Field can increase beyond the system bandwidth causing interference with other channels Bytes per Field is the target compression rate Not every field requires the target rate it is simply the average rate the disk recorder tries The higher the rate
90. 68 Profile Family Analog Composite Video Output The Procamp controls are adjusted with either the slider bars or arrow buttons The corresponding numeric values are displayed in the text boxes Video Gain raises or lowers the overall amplitude of the video signal It has a range of 50 to 200 percent of nominal Chroma Gain changes the amplitude of the chrominance portion of the signal to change the color intensity It has a range of 50 to 200 percent of nominal Black Level sets the voltage level of the reference black level This is expressed in mV in the PAL video standard and in IRE units in NTSC The range in the PAL standard is 140 to 140 mV The range in the NTSC standard is 20 to 20 IRE Chroma Phase sets the colors by varying the phase of the chrominance subcarrier The range is 45 to 45 Luminance Black Clip Level is the point where the procamp clips the Iuminance portion of any video that drops below this level For PAL the range is 150 mV to O mV and 20 IRE to 7 5 IRE or 0 IRE if pedestal is not selected in the NTSC standard Luminance White Clip Level follows the same logic only it clips any luminance above the set threshold Its range in the PAL standard is 700 to 909 5 mV and 100 to 139 5 IRE in the NTSC standard Default Procamp resets the Procamp to the factory defined levels Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings Click Close to accept the changes
91. 9 Give focus to New Clip Name 0 Give focus to Bin Display Ctrl M Media Manager Ctrl N New Project File Ctrl O Open Project File Ctrl S Save Project File Profile Family Chapter 9 Using the List Manager The Profile List Manager lets you automate your use of the Profile video disk recorder You ll probably want to use List Manager to schedule playback of JPEG or MPEG clips or masters created in the Tool Box Editor on designated outputs List Manager also lets you record incoming video at predetermined times or send incoming video directly to an output You can also set up times to switch a live connection transfer media between Profile systems connected via Fibre Channel or even archive a clip on a library unit You can combine these functions to increase the automation level of your station operations See Figure 133 NOTE Profile system software version 2 5 supports List Manager version 1 2 This version supports MPEG List Manager Overview The Profile List Manager works with events Each event is a task or operation that List Manager performs on a clip or a master or on incoming video List Manager uses a software engine called the Event Scheduler Engine to schedule your lists It runs behind the scenes and does all the actual work of playing and recording clips at the appointed times This low level software starts automatically when you start the List Manager and continues to run for the rest of that Windows NT
92. AA C pa entire Media Fi ile Cancel Figure 50 The Paste Special dialog box Profile Family 117 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager 118 Moving Media To move a clip or master to another bin l In the contents pane select a clip or master To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane Choose Cut from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Cut button on the toolbar Select the location where you want to paste the media This can be another bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window If both the source and the destination locations reside on machines connected to the Fibre Channel network you may copy between machines Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar Pasting media into the same bin has no effect To move a clip or master using Paste Special 1 In the contents pane select a clip or master To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane Choose Cut from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Cut button on the toolbar Select
93. Bit rate in megabits per second The higher the bit rate the higher the video quality though more disk space is used In other words the higher the video quality the fewer hours of video you can store on disk 5 Click OK Profile Family Selecting Vertical Blanking Interval Storage Lines Edit compression presets x Preset Name JPEG Best compromise 0 75 Min lum Q Most recording time Custom setting fi 00 00 Max chroma Q T Fixed Q fi 00000 Bytes per field MPEG s PperGOP 42 2 OK Bperyp C 4 2 0 IT Open GOP 24 00000 Bit rate Mb sec Cancel Figure 82 Edit Compression Presets dialog box Selecting Vertical Blanking Interval Storage Lines The MPEG section of the Edit compression presets dialog box has a button labeled VBI lines see Figure 82 This button opens the Vertical Blanking Interval Storage dialog box see Figure 83 which allows you to select from one to three lines in the vertical blanking interval VBI that will not be compressed with the video data but will be stored without being encoded to avoid losses This is desirable for uses such as closed captioning which would be seriously degraded by losses incurred at lower bit rates The Compress VBI checkbox at the top forces all the lines in the VBI to be compressed The other checkboxes allow you to select up to three of the Luminance or Chrominance lines Profile Family 171 Chap
94. Click OK NOTE Absolute events are always shown in bold face and Follow events are displayed in regular face 308 Profile Family Customizing Your List Display You can change the text color another way besides the Font dialog box as well as the text highlight background color The Color dialog box allows you a much broader range of colors than the Font dialog box The change the text s color or highlight color 1 Choose View Color Text or View Color Highlight and the Color dialog box appears Figure 145 Color Basic colors E EE MIT A Ee EG imini i imi 1m EONS NN NN ESI E EN UN NUI EERE E Custom colors i pp ep i op N ue 125 Bed 255 ii ie pp ep i Se Green 5 Define Custom alors gt gt Color Solid Lum 240 Blue 255 Figure 145 Color dialog box with custom color controls shown 2 To select a preset color click one of the basic 48 colors and then OK 3 To create a custom color move the cursor in the rainbow window until you find the color you want then click Add to Custom Colors The color is added to the array of custom color boxes 4 Toselect a custom color click on one of the custom color boxes that contains a custom color then click OK Profile Family 309 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager You can change which columns to display the size of the columns and order of the columns in the list display You display up to 10 columns in a list By default the Name
95. DR Access Control from the list of services You may have to scroll the list box 6 Click Start to start the service By default the service is automatically restarted whenever the system is rebooted It is unlikely that you will ever need to start the service manually 7 Click on Stop to stop the service if desired 8 Click Close to close the Services dialog box gt gt gt CAUTION If the start up option is changed from Automatic the Profile applications are not able to run unless the service is started manually each time the system is rebooted 236 Updating Firmware Updating Firmware From time to time it becomes necessary to reprogram components on boards in your Profile disk recorder or video file server For example when you install MPEG boards in a PDR 200 you must upgrade components on the Master Enhanced Disk Recorder EDR board Updating the firmware in the selected components of these boards ensures that software and hardware will function together as expected To successfully update the EDR board it must be Revision 2 or higher You can determine the revision level of the boards by consulting the Profile log For information on reading logs see Viewing Profile Logs on page 211 NOTE This procedure applies if 1 You are field installing MPEG boards in a system that is not MPEG ready or 2 You are field installing an EDR board Systems with these boards installed in the factory serial number B030000
96. Delay Double click on the TimeDelay shortcut icon on the desktop When the TimeDelay window appears you can use the default settings that include one record and one playback panel see Figure 169 Double click on a TimeDelay project file tdx This launches TimeDelay using the configuration saved in the file NOTE TimeDelay uses the standard Windows NT interface For help with Windows NT interaction refer to Microsoft NT manuals To exit TimeDelay Choose File Quit 2 Untitled Project TimeDelay File View Config Help Buffer Size 01 36 03 28 B All Stop 00 00 00 00 Record ravi CIA r73A2 Playout Delay 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 4 Vi r3A1 mA2 if Figure 169 TimeDelay window 340 Profile Family Working With the TimeDelay Project Working With the TimeDelay Project A TimeDelay project includes the resource configuration for record and playback channels as well as application specific information like single or two column view current timecode source and information used for crash recovery This project information is stored in a file that uses a tdx file name extension When you start TimeDelay a default TimeDelay project is created Although it contains a record and playback channel the default project is not usable until you assign video and audio inputs and outputs with Resource Manager Once you save a TimeDelay project you can use the project file to start the TimeDe
97. Do not verify the cartridge fast import As long as the label matches one in the library the cartridge goes directly into an available slot If the library system can find no record of the barcode label the cartridge is stored as an unknown cartridge Toinventory the cartridge click Inventory the cartridge and update the library The cartridge is loaded into a transport and its contents are inventoried The database is updated if it did not match what was inventoried Toimport an unformatted cartridge click Import unformatted cartridge The cartridge is put into the first available slot and appears in the media tree with an unformatted cartridge icon Profile Family 141 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager To import a new cleaning cartridge click Import new cleaning cartridge The library system cannot differentiate between a cleaning cartridge and an ordinary cartridge It must be told when a cleaning cartridge is imported If you provide a unique tape label the cleaning cartridge is stored in a cleaning cartridge bin 5 Click Import 6 A prompt appears requesting that you physically insert the cartridge into the library Once the robot is in position and you insert the cartridge press any button on the library s control panel 7 The Importing Cartridge dialog box remains on the screen until the robot puts the cartridge in the available slot Since this is done in the background click OK at any time When the robot retr
98. DuHJ5 M AES EBU In545 Em NTAE5 EBU Dusu5 Crosspoints Cancel Apply Help Figure 158 Audio inputs and outputs Profile Family 327 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager 2 To add an audio track click the Add Track button In the Add Track dialog box that appears see Figure 159 click Audio then enter the number of tracks you want to add Click Add when done The new audio track icons will appear in the configuration tree Add Track Te Add track of type Additional Audio Tracks C Video Add 1 audio track s Audio C Timecode Y Cancel Help Figure 159 Add Track dialog box for audio 3 For each audio track choose an audio input or audio output by selecting a check box in the appropriate list 328 Profile Family Configuring Audio Resources Audio Window Setup The audio window is a segment of audio that is heard when you move through a clip at higher than play speed You can specify the size of the window and thus the amount of the audio that you hear by selecting a number of fields To set the audio window size 1 Select the Audio icon in the configuration tree 2 From the Audio Window Size box that appears select a size from the three available choices 5 fields 10 fields default and 20 fields Resource Manager B010278 3 Channel A a Video El Track 1 MPEG e la Timecode 38 Track 1 Figure 160 Audio Window Size list box Profile Family
99. E to E is activated When E to E is off the monitor shows the active timeline s current position When it is on and no clips are playing or recording the Profile channel s live video input bypasses the codec and is directly connected to the outputs Figure 124 E to E button Capturing a New Clip Now you are ready to capture or record a new clip Video Enable Button Record Button Audio Enable Button Figure 125 Record buttons 1 First you need to enable video and or audio for recording To enable inputs for recording you can click on video or audio buttons The buttons are lit when activated 266 Profile Family Capturing a New Clip 2 All acquired audio channels may be used when recording new clips However you need to select a set of audio channels To select a set of audio channels for recording Click the Audio Enable button Enable audio channels by clicking on the channel selection button above the appropriate audio meter See Figure 132 3 Enter the new clip name in the Clip Name text box or simply accept the default The default name automatically increments to a unique name With a right click in the text box you can choose from several editing commands Clip Name Text Box Figure 126 Clip Name text box 4 Click on the Record button You can also choose Record from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click 5 When you are done recording click on the Stop button See Fi
100. EN 302 Fontdialog DOX snenie eem oad ode NILA TA Tha edu deese be dad 308 Color dialog box with custom color controls shown llllllllsssn 309 Columns dialog DOK a x quu ides ERE RR e n RR NG Pata cgo te yas 310 An example of a log file 2 orm tender eo wk RR E Rs RO es 312 Resource Manager dialog box n 313 Choosing a channel type nen 316 Add Track dialog box for video 0 317 Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box JPEG 0 0 a 318 Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box MPEG 00 a 319 MPEG video track settings 0 tees 321 JPEG video track settings aaua unna AA nne 322 MPEG encoder and decoder check boxes a 323 JPEG codec check boxes sss na kanan NP RIO Ng NN Y KAG NAP NAA RR 324 Field Frame Setup controls eee 326 Audio inputs and outputs l l tenes 327 Add Track dialog box for audio lille 328 Audio Window Size list BOX onana RR 329 Profile Family 161 Timecode Input and Output check boxes een 330 162 Add Track dialog box for timecode ree 331 163 Timecode Codec check boxes e 333 164 Timecode generator controls tee 334 165 Tool Tip showing an external user llle 336 166 Tool Tip showing an internal user 0 eee 336 167 In use Tool Tip message RII 336 168 lt Error gt Tool Tip message nh 337 169 TimeDelay
101. ES Gra er Glebe ee eek abet a ae big A a HI ie na Ep a ba Es Gt Ei ES sb En GE NG na AA AE Se HEAL SEUEIESESESEEEBESL SERSESEME GE Stud Figure 86 Timecode Crosspoint dialog box 2 To assign a crosspoint click in the intersection between the signal and the recorder channel The selections turn green Profile Family 179 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel NOTE A timecode recorder must be used by a panel to be available as a timecode output XJ 3 Click the Close button NOTE To release a timecode output for use by another application click the box at the intersection of the output with the unused box Setting Drop Frame Timecode In NTSC and 525 60 you dont actually get 30 frames per second the real number is about 29 97 fps Timecode usually assumes 30 fps To account for the discrepancy drop frame timecode skips or drops two timecode values at the beginning of every minute except every tenth minute This allows timecode to exactly match a real time clock on 525 60 systems This correction is not needed on PAL or 625 50 systems because the frame rate is exactly 50 fps To set drop frame timecode Choose Options Drop Frame or Options Non Drop Frame NOTE This setting applies to all open panels channels Panel Basics In the VdrPanel application you can display up to eight Panel dialog boxes at a time one for each video channel Each Panel dialog box has independent controls A close up view of a Panel di
102. Ejecting All Clips 0 BenR 197 Deleting a Clipe siccu sorra eee 197 Clip ER AA AA 198 Saving a Group of Clips in a Clip List 0 198 Playing a Clip List 199 Editing a Clip List eee 199 Setting In and Out Marks in Clips 0 0 ee eee eee 200 Setting Marks 2i ssetE veo PARNER ROW RES RENE 201 Removing Marks ris padaan ah ANG hak GNG b qd EX hada 201 Trimming Clips iis exe km KANG KGG KAR PD RAANG ee ee eS 201 Setting Field Dominance for Marks 00 005 202 Using the Profile Disk Utility Creating a File System ee ee 204 Setting a Disk Label 0 0 2 ee 205 Formatting a Disk Volume 0 0 eee 206 Loading Microcode 0 0 c eee eee ee eee 207 Relocating and Testing Bad Blocks 00 eee aee 208 Phe Detail LOG vie seen ak tehe wh RE EG BG BT e me x ERREUR eet 209 Contents Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities Viewing Profile Logs lise IR 211 Log Capture TOoll rer E Rp ew nee eta CAE 214 Profile Protocol Resources ess 217 Using the Profile Protocol Resources Utility 217 Manually Editing a Configuration File 221 Resource Ines sar retta deu ent eis 222 Crosspoint lines lille 227 Sample Configuration Files llle 228 Basic Configuration llle 228 Assigning a Second JPEG Codec 229 Assigning an MPEG encoder 20
103. FF If the time entered consists of one or two digits not separated by colons List Manager displays the entry as a number of seconds not frames For example if the time entered is 25 List Manager displays 00 00 25 00 Leading zeros are ignored that is 0025 is interpreted as 00 00 25 00 290 Profile Family Changing Event Settings Duration The duration of the playback event is set by the duration of the media If you change the duration to one shorter than the media s duration List Manager will play the material from the mark in point for the specified duration If you enter a longer duration List Manager plays the material from the mark in point to the last mark out point then freezes on the last frame for the rest of the duration Comment The Comment cell displays the name of the master or clip which you dragged into the window You can change this to a title more meaningful to you However this will not change what clip or master is used nor will it change its name Optional Columns These are the columns that you can add to the window to provide you with additional event information Action When you drag material into the List Manager window Action is set to Play The possible actions are Play Record Switch Transfer and Archive These options are described in later in this chapter Event Number Events are numbered as they are added to the current list The event number can t be changed because it provides
104. File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Import Cartridge dialog box appears see Figure 63 If you have two or more PLS20 systems connected simultaneously you must enter a drive number when prompted 140 Profile Family Importing a Cartridge Import Cartridge x amp j Please enter the name of the cartridge a This name should match the cartridge s barcode Cancel Verify the cartridge with its library entry Help C Do not verify the cartridge fast import C Inventory the cartridge and update the library C Import unformatted cartridge C Import new cleaning cartridge Figure 63 Import Cartridge dialog box 3 Enter a unique label name number for the cartridge This name must match the barcode on the cartridge for example 00000015 If the label is not unique or matches a label already in the library the cartridge is rejected 4 Click a button to tell Media Manager how you want to import the cartridge If you want to verify the contents of the cartridge click Verify the cartridge with its library entry If the label barcode matches the one in the library and the directory entries match the cartridge is imported If the label matches but the directory entries do not the cartridge is rejected If the library system can find no record of the barcode label the cartridge is stored as an unknown cartridge Fora fast import with no verification of the cartridge s contents click
105. GK CHASE VALLEY GROUP User Manual software release 2 5 071 0565 01 MARCH 2000 PROFILE FAMILY VIDEO FILE SERVER Copyright Trademarks Disclaimer U S Government Restricted Rights Legend Revision Status Copyright 2000 Grass Valley Group Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced except as specifically permitted under U S copyright law without the prior written consent of Grass Valley Group Inc P O Box 59900 Nevada City California 95959 7900 Grass Valley GRASS VALLEY GROUP Profile and Profile XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Grass Valley Group in the United States and or other countries Other trademarks used in this document are either registered trademarks or trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the associated products Grass Valley Group products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Additional information regarding Grass Valley Group s trademarks and other proprietary rights may be found at www grassvalleygroup com Product options and specifications subject to change without notice The information in this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Grass Valley Group Grass Valley Group assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that
106. ITC in the house reference or simply the offset in the record buffer Play Button Stop Button Pause Button Menus Starts the playback channel immediately overriding the current playout delay and updating the playout delay control Stops the playback channel when playback stops the output channel shows black Press the stop button to modify the playout delay after the TimeDelay process has started Pauses the playback output The playout delay increases as long as the playback channel is paused Press pause again or press play to resume playback Video Audio Status Lights The number of status lights indicates the number of video and audio tracks in the record channel A Video status light turns red when the corresponding video track is not receiving a signal An audio status lights turn red when the audio input signal peaks and has to be clipped Show Hide Meters Button Expands the panel to show video and audio meters Video Audio Meters Menus The video meter shows the record channel s data rate relative to the maximum rate Audio meters show the audio input level in dB TimeDelay menus include the following File View Config Hel Remote Connection Connect to a remote Profile unit Hemate bornent Import Imports the resource settings from an Import existing TimeDelay project but keeps the Open current machine connection Save ee Save s Open Opens an existing TimeDelay project file pr
107. LTC Name Output LTC Name LTC J16 LTC Out J16 LTC n2 J15 LTC Out2 J16 LTC n3 J15 LTC Out3 J16 LTC n4 J15 LTC Out4 J15 Close Unda Ni Figure 10 LTC Inputs amp Outputs dialog box 1 Select an LTC input or output name Position the edit cursor within the appropriate edit box Enter the new name or portion of a name The new name appears in the name list nA A U N Click Undo to return the name or names as they were at the time the dialog box appeared 6 Click Close to accept the new LTC name or names 50 Profile Family Setting MPEG Input Timing Setting MPEG Input Timing If you have one or more MPEG board s installed that have decoders only no encoders and you are running in BVW insert edit mode see Setting up BVW insert edit Emulation on page 172 you need to obtain a timing signal from a video I O board to synchronize your output To select a timing input for the MPEG board 1 Click or double click MPEG Board from the configuration tree and the Input Timing Selection dialog box appears see Figure 11 MPEG Board J13 x Input Timing Selection Composite InA J11 Close Unde 1 Figure 11 MPEG Input Timing dialog box 2 In the Input Timing box select the board from which you want to get the timing signal 3 Click Undo to return to original input timing source 4 Click Close Profile Family 51 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Video In
108. Manager Custom Video Quality Setting Figure 151 Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box JPEG Table 18 JPEG Video Quality Settings Quality Settings Compression in Mbps Draft 12 Low 24 Medium default 36 High 48 Custom 1 or 2 6 54 in increments of 6 24 default 318 Profile Family Configuring Video Resources Custom Video Quality Settings Video Quality Custom1 m Undo Bit Rate 60 Group of Pictures Medium Low Draft Chrominance G 4 2 2 Scc Bit Rate 24 Mbps Group Of Pictures IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP Figure 152 Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box MPEG Table 19 MPEG Video Quality Settings Quality Settings Compression Chrominance GOP in Mbps Draft 4 4 2 0 IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP default Low 8 Medium default 15 4 2 2 High 24 Custom 1 or 2 4 44 in 4 2 2 default Choose from I IP IBP IBBP IBPBP increments of4 or 4 2 0 IBBPBBP IBPBPBPBP 12 default IBBPBBPBBP IBBPBBPBBPBBP and IBBPBBPBBPBBPBBP default Profile Family 319 T Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager 6 Click the Crosspoints button and then select a video input from the Video Input check boxes see Figure 153 for MPEG or Figure 154 for JPEG The names of video inputs are determined by the system configuration created with the Configuration Manager application see Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configura
109. Manager lets you use a simple graphical interface to build lists that automate your operations You can drag media from the Media Manager into your list then define things like when to play the material and what channel and output to use Drag and drop of incompatible clips is not allowed There are four types of channels JPEG MPEG Record MPEG Play MPEG Play Record JPEG channels allow only JPEG clips and MPEG channels allow only MPEG clips JPEG channels allow any type of events play record etc MPEG Play allow any type of events except record MPEG Record allow any type of events except play MPEG Play Record allow any type of events play record etc Adding Media for Playback Creating a playback list is the simplest of all List Manager operations To build a playback only list 1 Click the Monitor tab to view of the On air List The first time you use List Manager this list should be empty 2 Scroll through the Media Manager tree to locate the first clip or master that you wish to include in your list 3 Drag the clip or master into the List Manager window and drop it at the desired location in the list You can add clips or masters between two existing events by dropping an event on the line separating the two events and selecting the top event The item is inserted below the selected event 4 Change the event settings to meet your needs The settings are described in Changing Event Settings on pag
110. NANG eae RERO ROS E RARO 225 Timecode Parameters lisse ren 226 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts liliis 279 Event status Indicators i sod iosi a tease Pace pde I RR Rem gng 290 Ghanneltypes 233 uc gae wane phe ee pane Raat ead RISE EROR A d 316 JPEG Video Quality Settings 2l 318 MPEG Video Quality Settings llle 319 Profile Family Preface About this Manual The Profile Family User Manual supports Profile system software 2 5 for the PDR200 and PDR 300 Profile Video File Servers and with a Master Enhanced Disk Recorder board upgrade the Profile PDR 100 Video Disk Recorder Profile disk recorders use digital technology to store and produce broadcast quality JPEG and MPEG video and CD quality audio This manual documents the standard and optional software applications that run on the Profile platform The Profile Configuration Manager configures your hardware for input and output of video and audio genlock and system timing The Media Manager manages clips and masters on disk and in a cartridge library system With Fibre Channel you can use Media Manager to copy or move media between Profile units The Transcode Utility converts media between different video compression formats such as from JPEG to MPEG VdrPanel lets you capture and use JPEG and MPEG video and audio clips The Profile Disk Utility lets you manage the Profile systems media disk drives The optional Tool Box Editor re
111. Panel The Audio Monitor allows you to monitor the level of an audio signal for a panel To view a panel s audio monitor 1 Click a panel to make it active 2 Choose Window Audio Monitor The Audio dialog box appears as shown in Figure 90 There are only two channels in this example but up to 32 channels are possible if the necessary boards are installed 188 Profile Family Viewing an Audio Monitor for a Panel Panel A Audio Gg Close Button PeakHold Levels Recofgld e 80 0 0 Peak Indicators Channel Indicators Play Level Controls Figure 90 Audio Monitor dialog box To turn peak hold on or off choose PeakHold On or PeakHold Off By default peak hold is on The peak indicators the white bars in record level controls indicates the audio peak you are currently recording To show the record level controls choose Levels Show Record Level Controls To show play level controls choose Levels Show Play Level Controls To hide the level controls choose Levels Hide Level Controls To work the record and play level controls independently choose Levels Independent Controls To gang the controls choose Levels Ganged Controls Click Close XJ Profile Family 189 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 190 Using Clips With VdrPanel you can define rename and delete a clip You can load an existing clip or group of clips Defining a New Clip There are two methods for defining clips
112. Select one or more clips or masters that you want to transcode in Media Manager s contents pane In Media Manager choose Tools Transcode The Transcode Utility dialog box appears with the selected media in the transcode list You may add more clips or masters to the transcode list by dragging them from Media Manager and dropping them on the list You can also transfer media using Copy and Paste commands In the Convert tab select the target format either MPEG or JPEG In the Video Quality box select a video quality if you want something other than the default Medium The higher the quality the more disk space is used To change a custom quality setting click the button next to the Video Quality list box and the Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box appears Select either Custom1 or Custom2 in the Video Quality list box When selected you can change the name of a custom setting Click Undo to cancel changes and OK when done For JPEG see Figure 58 and Table 6 select a video quality with the slider You can move the slider with the mouse or arrow keys For MPEG see Figure 59 and Table 7 select a chrominance value either 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 Then move the diamond on the grid or click the High Medium Low or Draft button the corresponding bit rate and picture structure is shown on the right side of the dialog box NOTE You can edit I frame clips only To make an MPEG clip I frame drag the diamond to
113. Select the controller for the channel such as Louth Automation 4 Click OK Controller Setup x Panel Control Louth Automation Odetics Broadcast BYW BVW insert edit Cancel Figure 77 Controller Setup dialog box 162 Profile Family Selecting a Communications Port Selecting a Communications Port To select a serial communications port for an external controller 1 Click a panel to make it active NOTE Other than for Panel Control the Comm Port dialog box appears automatically the first time you select a controller 2 Choose Controller Comm Port to open the Comm Port dialog box An example of this dialog box is shown in Figure 78 Panel A Comm Port Ed Cancel Figure 78 Comm Port dialog box NOTE Ports PI through P8 are available on the RS 422 Connector Panel COMI and COM2 are available on the unit s back panel RS 232 DB 9 connectors Any P ports used by VdrPanel should have the DIP switches set to Device DIP switch must be down 3 Select a serial communications port such as P1 4 Click OK Profile Family 163 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Selecting Clip Length BVW Only If you have chosen a BVW controller you can specify clip length by setting mark in and mark out points pa NOTE The Set Clip Marks clip length dialog box shown here will not appear unless the panel controller is a BVW controller This is not the same as setting clip length while in Loop or Bounce
114. You can create and name an empty clip then record to it Name Clip First You can start recording with an empty clip list then rename the recorded clip to a meaningful name Record Clip First Either method creates and stores a named clip Use whichever method is most convenient for you You can choose VideoClip Rename Clip at any time to change a clip name Name Clips First To define a clip by first naming the clip 1 2 3 Click in a panel to select it Select VideoClip New Clip to open the New Clip dialog box Figure 91 Select a drive from the Drive list The number of drives available depends on your hardware Enter a clip name up to 32 characters long Spaces and uppercase characters are acceptable however uppercase and lowercase characters will not distinguish clip names Click OK The new clip is added to the clip list for the selected channel If the Loop or Bounce buttons are pressed in the panel a dialog appears asking you to specify the loop or bounce duration in the form 00 00 00 00 Click the Record button in the selected Panel dialog box to begin recording The timecode and compression rate fields are updated NOTE A video input signal must be present on the selected channel Jor recording to start Click Stop to stop recording Profile Family Defining a New Clip x Figure 91 New Clip dialog box Profile Family 191 T Chapter 4 192 Using
115. a one for one replacement of a VTR it can have up to six record and eight playback video channels Clips are available on all channels at once so you can play a clip on more than one channel at the same time without making a copy of it Since each channel is independent of the others each playback can start at a different time and at a different place in the clip You can even start playing a clip while it s still being recorded Just start capturing the clip on one channel wait about five seconds and then play the clip back on another channel This kind of control makes the Profile system an ideal solution if you want to go to air with a clip before you are finished recording it NOTE Profile System Software version 2 5 supports the PDR 200 the PDR300 and when upgraded with a Master and Slave Enhanced Disk Recorder EDR boards the PDR 100 In addition version 2 5 runs on Microsoft Windows NT 3 51 and 4 0 This version of system software offers support for the MPEG 2 4 2 2 9 Main Level encoder decoder boards which are standard in the PDR 300 Upgrading your PDR200 with MPEG can approximately double its video audio storage capacity and enables much faster data transfers over Fibre Channel The MPEG encoder offers both 4 2 2 and 4 2 0 chroma sampling variable bit rates from 4 Mb s to 50 Mb s and group of picture GOP structures from I frame only to 16 frame GOPs MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency essentiall
116. a unique identifier for this event in the current list The event number does not determine the playback order Parent This setting uses the number of the event that precedes it the parent event and is valid only for Follow events Any event can be a parent event as long as it has a Follow event after it Type The event types are The Absolute event type plays the material at the time specified in the Start Time An Absolute event is always displayed in bold face in the list The Follow event type plays the event immediately after the preceding event in the list A Follow event is always displayed in regular face in the list The Approx eventtype is queued but will not play unless you select the event from the list and then issue a Take command An Approx event is always displayed in bold face in the list Date Enter the date on which you wish the event to take place Dates must be in the format used in your current Windows NT session usually MM DD YYYY The current date is entered by default Profile Family 291 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Settings Unique to Transfer Events Transfer events add these settings refer to Scheduling a Transfer Event on page 298 Source Media The path name of the source media Source Profile The name of the Profile unit where the media is stored Destination Media The path name of the destination media Destination Profile The name of the Profile unit to
117. acts with the imported cartridge it scans the cartridges s barcode If the barcode does not match the name that was entered for the import it is rejected Exporting a Cartridge To export a cartridge is to eject or remove it from the library system 1 In the tree pane select the icon for the cartridge you want to export 2 Choose Export Cartridge from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click and the Export Cartridge dialog box appears By default the cartridge location is Out of library Export Cartridge x Cartridge location ap Out of library Cancel v Update the Cartridge Help Permanently remove from the library database Figure 64 Export Cartridge dialog box 142 Profile Family Exporting a Cartridge 3 Select the appropriate box If you select Update the cartridge the cartridge is loaded into a transport and its directory is updated to reflect clip name changes or deletions Then the cartridge is ejected If you select Permanently remove from the library database all references to the cartridge are deleted from the library database then the cartridge is ejected Tf you select both boxes the cartridge is loaded into a transport and its directory is updated to reflect clip name changes or deletions This information is saved on the cartridge Then all references to the cartridge are deleted from the library database and the cartridge is ejected 4 Click Export 5
118. ailable for MPEG masters The name of the clip or master How many tracks the clip or master uses for both audio and video The media format either NTSC or PAL NTSC clips are recorded with either drop frame or non drop frame timecode The length of the clip or master The length is shown in timecode format 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The date and time that the media was created and the date and time it was last changed The date and time the media was created or last changed is shown in the form 12 2 94 9 40 PM The read only attribute which you can change by clicking the Read Only box Clips and masters with the read only attribute cannot be renamed deleted or modified in any way Deleting Media When the amount of remaining disk storage begins to get low the time remaining is displayed below the edit timeline you can free space by deleting unused media 1 Select media from the current bin display You can select either clips or masters you can also select several clips or masters at a time Choose Delete from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click Press the Delete key or the Delete button on the bin toolbar A dialog box asks you to confirm that you want to delete the selection If you click on Yes the media is deleted if you click on No the operation is cancelled When media is deleted it is moved to the Recycle bin until the Recycle bin is emptied NOTE I
119. al Digital Component Video Output dialog box 0 eee eee eee 74 Serial Digital Video Output dialog box Advanced tab 2 0000005 76 Analog Audio Input dialog box nanasa aaau tees 78 Digital Audio Input dialog box 2 ete 79 Analog Audio Output dialog box 000 tee 81 Digital Audio Output dialog box 2 2 0 eee 82 Analog Audio Input dialog box Main tab 0000 c cee eee 84 Analog Audio Input dialog box Line Level tab 0000000 eee 85 Digital Audio Input dialog box Main tab 0 cece ee 86 Digital Audio Input dialog box Status tab 00 000 eee eee 87 Digital Audio Input dialog box Sample Rate Converter tab 88 Analog Audio Output dialog box Main tab 0 0000 c eee eee 89 Analog Audio Output dialog box Line Mode tab a 90 Analog Audio Outputs dialog box Line Level tab 00 0 91 Digital Audio Output dialog box 2 2 02 sees 92 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Mapping tab lisse 93 Profile Family Contents 11 T Contents 12 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Audio Configuration dialog box Output Mapping tab 0 00 e eee 94 Audio Configuration dialog box Input Clocking tab a 98 Audio Configuration dialog box Monitor Channe
120. alog bDOxX 1 Ih 196 96 Delete Clip dialog box I 197 97 Save Group of Clips dialog box sees 198 98 Load Group of Clips dialog box sese 199 99 Edit Clip List dialog box eee yer ERR RE ERG SEE EAR 200 100 Field Dominance dialog box RII 202 101 Profile Disk Utility window RI IIIR 203 102 Set Label dialog box ene 205 103 Format Disk s dialog box re 206 104 Microcode Filename to Load dialog box cece ees 207 105 Detail Log dialog BOX ri inna en aai a aent d I e ee 209 106 Win Tall Window uolo Pa DELTA NGA DUB Fun C GU Yu e ETE 212 107 Log set selection screen re 214 108 Size selection screen ene 215 109 Log tool complete screen re 216 110 The main Profile Protocol Resources dialog box 218 111 Setting JPEG compression ene 219 112 Setting MPEG compression 220 T13 PortServer windOW ze cR See eG euet R alae bas KAGAD eg ee 234 114 Services dialog box nen 236 115 Update Firmware window 0 2 2 re 238 116 The Update FC Microcode window 022 lee 240 117 Tool Box Editor window 0 2 I e 254 118 Hardware Communication message box eee 255 119 Remote Machine dialog box nh 258 120 Current bin display RI III 260 Profile Family Contents 13 T Contents 14 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129
121. alog box is shown in Figure 87 A description of each Panel function follows NOTE If the panels are stacked choose Window Tile Panels The VdrPanel interface follows the same conventions as other Windows NT applications the control menu box title bar menu bar minimize and maximize buttons mouse and keyboard all perform as expected Refer to specific operating information about these items in the Windows NT manuals 180 Profile Family Panel Basics 3 Timecode 2 Size 1 Type 4 Play 3E 5 Stop Panel A Panel Control O x 6 Rewind Clips 7 Record meco e Dn size type Night Fa m a Afternoon 28 Clip Name 8 Fast Br gt Evening Box Forward rew fwd LateEvening 27 Shuttle Rate Morning 9 Field mci Selection 26 Shuttle Bar 10 Normal 25 Go to Clip 11 Loop wa 3 J SECUS Beginning 12 Bounce 24 Back One 13 PB EE Ie ed a Field T 23 Forward 14 BUE E r Te tr raossas Group One Field osition Bar 15 Remove In 4 x a fea KI EX 22 Go to Mark hes Clip End 16 Set In Mark 17 Trim to 18 Trim from 19 Set Out 20 Remove 21 Group Name In Mark Out Mark Mark Out Mark Box pa Figure 87 Panel dialog box The Type box shows the type of pictures I for I frame B for Bidirectional and P for Predictive B and P apply only to MPEG pictures An I frame picture or Intra picture is analogous in JPEG and MPEG and so applies to both The Si
122. analog embedded digital and AES EBU digital audio You can install up to two ASPBs in a PDR200 for 32 channels of audio Assemble record mode Video and all audio tracks assigned to a machine are recorded simultaneously along with timecode and any previous contents are overwritten Traditionally this mode is used when appending to a master tape that has not had black timecode and control track previously recorded before editing Profile Family 365 T Glossary Audio O The audio path through the Profile video disk recorder especially the crosspoint circuitry that routes the audio within the Profile system Auto Start A feature that lets you enter a timecode and have the record buffer start recording at that timecode Bit rate The rate at which video streams in megabits per second Mb sec The bit rate is a reflection of quality the higher the bit rate the higher the quality of video However video data stored at a high bit rate consumes more disk storage space than data stored at a lower rate Bit rates can be as low as 6 Mb sec and as high as 54 Mb sec The default video quality bit rate is 24 Mb sec which is broadcast quality BNC Connector used in professional A V components The BNC connection provides optimum shielding between the video input signal lines to provide the best possible performance BNC was recently adopted as an alternate AES signal connector B Picture A B picture is a bidirectionally
123. and decoders The following sections explain how to use the Profile Protocol Resources utility You ll also find an explanation of the contents of a configuration file and some sample files that you may find helpful if you need to modify files manually Using the Profile Protocol Resources Utility When you start the Profile Protocol Resources utility by double clicking its icon a large dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 110 appears The available Profile resources are displayed in the dialog box Note that these resources will vary according to the features of each Profile system For example while JPEG codecs are available on all Profile systems MPEG encoders appear as resources only on Profile models that are so equipped Profile Family 217 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities Profile Protocol Resources SDI Dut amp 414 SDI OutBJ14 SDI Out4J15 SDI DutB J15 AES EBU In1J5 AES EBU In2J5 AES EBU In3J5 AES EBU In4J5 AES EBU In5J5 AES EBU In5 J5 AES EBU In J5 AES EBU In8J5 AES EBU In3J5 AES EBU In10 J5 AES EBU In11 J5 AES EBU In1245 AES EBU In1345 AES EBU In14 J5 AES EBU In15 J5 Arc Urnmitt ae IC DYCPRO25 4 AES EBU Dutl J5 AES EBU Out2J5 AES EBU Out3J5 AES EBU Out4J5 AES EBU Dut5J5 AES EBU Out6J5 AES EBU Out J5 AES EBU Out8J5 AES EBU OutSJ5 AES EBU OutlOJ5 AES EBU Outl1J5 AES EBU Dut12 J5 AES EBU Dut1 345 AES EBU Outl4J5 AES EBU Outl5J5 APCUrMIIM ate IC LTC Dut1 J16 LTC Out2J16 LTC Out
124. and higher are already updated The reprogramming is based on references in the file c profile edr_isp all Do not alter this file in any way as it may lead to incorrect programming of parts To update firmware 1 Close any applications that may be running on the system 2 At a command line type vdrsvc stop and then press Enter This stops the PDR Access Service 3 Choose Start Programs PDR Debug Tools Update EDR Firmware or double click the Update EDR Firmware icon A window appears 4 The program warns you to shutdown any applications that may be running and to stop the PDR Access Service If you have already done so as instructed in steps 1 and 2 type Y Otherwise type N and return to step 1 Profile Family 237 238 Copyright Cc Alter poration and Tektronix Inc 1997 ISP Embedded Proces Code v1 86 ISP reprograms Altera parts on the EDR and MHB boards This could have an adverse effect on the i966 if applic are running Please shutdown all applications and stop vdrsuc Cvdrsuc stop before proceedin g Continue with ISP program Yy Nn Figure 115 Update Firmware window 5 The update procedure steps through the reprogramming of the components giving progress information as it proceeds It retries up to three times to reprogram parts in the event of verification errors After reprogramming all parts a summary is provided that describes what has been done 6 If parts have failed to program pow
125. another instance of the Media Manager Choose Tools Tool Box Editor to start the optional Tool Box Editor if available See Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor on 253 Choose Tools List Manager to start the optional List Manager if available See Chapter 9 Using the List Manager on 281 Choose Tools Transcode to start the Transcode Utility This utility converts media between different compression formats such as from JPEG to MPEG See Using the Transcode Utility on page 130 When an application is started from the Media Manager it initially connects to the machine that was selected in the Media Manager s machine list box If the application is not installed an error occurs Profile Family Viewing and Hiding the Toolbar and Status Bar Viewing and Hiding the Toolbar and Status Bar By default the toolbar is visible To hide it Choose View Toolbar To make it visible again choose View Toolbar again By default the status bar is visible To hide it Choose View Status Bar To make it visible again choose View Status Bar again To refresh the tree and contents panes Choose View Refresh or press F5 Viewing Help and Software Version Information To view Help topics on Media Manager Choose Help Media Manager Help Topics To view program and software version information and copyright Choose Help About Media Manager Profile Family 109 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Connecting
126. arget compression rate 169 TC Recorder 178 TCP IP 242 TCREC 173 TekCfg 28 TekPdr 28 TekRem 28 TekVdr 28 TekVfs 28 TekVme 28 TekXfr 28 Temporal Spatial Adaptive 57 Testing a bad block 208 Text insertion point 378 Time base correction 59 Time Till Next Event in Monitor view 293 Timecode 177 181 crosspoint 178 display 181 Index drop frame 180 265 entry window 265 free run 178 freeze 178 internal generator 331 lock to field number 178 Timecode Resources changing generator settings 334 choosing codecs and generators 332 configuring 330 Timecode Source 378 TimeDelay 35 339 363 auto start 351 configuring channels 346 configuring resources 315 346 connecting to a remote machine 343 menus 361 playback panel 360 project file 341 record panel 359 Timeline capture 264 edit 273 Timeline Eject 260 Timing Adjustment 75 Tool Box Editor 35 159 253 configuring resources 315 exiting 254 launching 254 Tool Tips 378 Toolbar 38 Media Manager 109 Toolbar buttons 115 Tracks 378 Profile Family 391 T Index Transcode Utility 130 Transfer Event 298 Transfer Monitor 156 Transport controls cue 268 fast forward 268 loop play 268 mode 268 play 268 reverse 268 rewind 268 stop 268 Transport status 153 Tree hierarchy 112 Trigger Follow 300 Trim from Out Mark 184 Trim to In Mark 184 Trimming 378 Type box 181 U Undo button 38 Unity audio 278 Unlocking clips 195 Update Fibre Channel Microco
127. ator is turned on For more information on auto timing see Auto Timing on page 47 Click Enable Dithering if the incoming signal is 10 bit resolution This will produce the best quality result The LSB artifacts on 10 bit video feeds are reduced There is no effect if the incoming signal is 8 bit Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings Click Close to accept all inputs Profile Family 65 Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced The Advanced tab allows you to determine whether the EDH Error Detection and Handling packet is present which audio groups 1 4 are present and which errors are present Full Field FF CRC or Active Picture AP CRC plus parity and checksum errors To reset EDH for serial digital video input 1 Click the Advanced tab to view the Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced settings Digital Component Video Input J5 A SDI InA J5 Figure 20 Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced 2 Click Reset FF CRC to reset Full Field errors or Reset AP CRC to reset Active Picture errors 3 Click Undo to undo the resets 4 Click Close to exit 66 Profile Family Video Output Video Output You can configure either analog composite or serial digital component video output on your Profile system depending on which boards are installed Analog Composite Video Output To open
128. bin display with a duration of only one frame 5 Click Create Mark out The new clip s duration is updated 6 Repeat steps 2 4 7 Click the Stop button when done 272 Profile Family The Edit Timeline The Edit Timeline gm The edit timeline lets you edit masters and their tracks of video and audio up to sixteen tracks of audio The current frame is indicated by the placement of the current position time cursor The horizontal scroll bar allows you to scroll through time and the vertical scroll bar allows you to scroll through tracks Select the Edit button beneath the audio controls to activate the edit timeline without changing the current time position Edit Master Name Selected Clip Current Position Time Cursor Linear Timecode Readout Trim Handles Track Labels Zoom Out 1 Audio 2 Video Readouts Scroll Bars Figure 130 Edit timeline Beneath the edit timeline is a toolbar displaying these buttons Zoom in Zooms in the track scale Zoom out Zooms out the track scale You can insert clips at the edit closest to the current time position by choosing Insert from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click or by clicking Insert Media on the current bin toolbar Profile Family 273 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor After you have inserted material onto the edit timeline you can trim source material You can trim clips directly with trim handles To make th
129. boards Fibre Channel Support You can use Fibre Channel video networking capabilities to move media from one Profile unit directly to another With Media Manager you can use the Fibre Channel connection to transfer media files between machines Ethernet LAN is also required for transferring commands and status information For more information see Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Profile Family Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager The Profile Configuration Manager provides an easy to use interface that streamlines the set up of reference genlock video and audio inputs and outputs system timing and timecode for your Profile video disk recorder The configuration tree allows you to open the specific configuration dialog boxes that control the settings A graphic representation of the Profile rear panel at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window shows which boards are installed The Configuration Manager window appears in Figure 3 w Profile Configuration Manager OE x File View Option Window Help Q 25 252 54 Nrscises gal ial Genlock lisi LTC Input amp Output jef MPEG Board J8 jef MPEG Board J12 Video Input 3 i Video Output 5 4 Audio Input a Audio Output Toolbar Configuration tree Profile rear panel representation FEEFEEEEE Not RS 422 Ref Vid NO SD Vid VO SDI Md ko MPEG Sla
130. box to their original settings 10 Click Close to accept all inputs 54 Profile Family Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control The Advanced Control tab allows you to select a decode mode clamp speed and other settings depending on which analog composite card you have To change advanced controls settings 1 Click or double click on the Advanced Control tab to view it Figure 14 shows the dialog box for the most recent analog composite video cards while Figure 15 shows the dialog box for earlier cards Analog Composite Video Input J5 Composite InA J5 E t Tow SO Fast Figure 14 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab A Profile Family 55 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Video Input J5 Composite InA J5 Si Esyyus rire STAG Whe Slay SEd E Figure 15 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab B 2 Click a setting for decode mode Decode mode determines how the chrominance and luminance information is separated for conversion for storage There are three options for the current analog composite cards and four options for the earlier cards Notch Filter Decode mode separates the chrominance by using a notch filter around the chrominance subcarrier This leaves the high frequency luminance intertwined with the chrominance A notch decoder readily det
131. brary 1 Choose Tape Transport Status from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Tape Transport Status dialog box appears Tape Transport Status Figure 73 Tape Transport Status dialog box Profile Family 153 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager The labels in the dialog box are explained here Transport Icon A transport icon is shown for each active transport J in the library The order of transports in this dialog does not necessarily reflect the order they appear in the library system Transport Number This is the logical identifier for the transport It is a number from 0 255 Robot Position This is the physical transport identifier It is a num ber from 0 3 Cartridge Name A cartridge name is shown if one is currently loaded into the transport Disable Removes a transport from service Click Add to re enable the transport Clean Loads a cleaning cartridge and cleans the transport Cleaning Message The message Needs Cleaning appears when the transport is due for cleaning Add Adds a transport to the list of available transports Close Close the Tape Transport Status dialog Help Opens the help topic on the Tape Transport Status dialog To add a transport to the list of active transports 1 In the tree pane select the appropriate library icon 2 Choose Tape Transport Status from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Tape Transport Status dialog b
132. but in Resource Manager the first tab is always the record channel The record panel might shorten long channel names to fit in the display This edit box displays in timecode format the duration of the record buffer the length of material recorded before the buffer fills and starts recording at the beginning of the buffer This control allows you to set the duration of the TimeDelay buffer The minimum buffer size is 10 seconds The maximum buffer size is the recording capacity of the current record buffer volume By default the maximum buffer size is shown when TimeDelay is started Displays the current timecode source value Timecode sources include external VITC and LTC signals internal timecode generators the VITC in the house reference or simply the offset in the record buffer The timecode source is chosen in Resource Manager Starts the TimeDelay process When you click this button the record panel starts recording and the playback panels start their delays Opens the Auto Start dialog box Auto start allows you to trigger the TimeDelay process using the current timecode source This button is enabled only when the current timecode source is a VITC or LTC signal Profile Family 359 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay 360 Countdown Display All Stop Button Shows the amount of time before the record panel automatically starts The Countdown Display appears only when the Auto Start mode is active Stops the TimeD
133. cartridge list a An unformatted cartridge f An unformatted out of library cartridge 2 Cartridges that are in an unknown state SA An unknown out of library cartridge LJ A partition appears under cartridges This is a closed partition SI An open partition Viewing the Media Hierarchy Toolbar The Media Manager toolbar provides one button access to commands sl Add Remove Machine Opens the Add Remove Machine dialog box Select Current Machine box Expands the machine item in the tree Up One Level Goes to the folder one level up Cut Removes the selected items and copies them onto the clipboard Use Paste to put them in the new location Copy Copies the selected items to the clipboard Use Paste to put them in the new location ing Paste Inserts the items you have copied or cut into the selected location Delete Deletes the selected items g ix im Properties Displays the properties of the selected item Profile Family 115 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager 116 Copying Media To copy one or more clips or masters 1 In the contents pane select a clip or master To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar Select the location where you wan
134. cartridge that cleans tape transports on demand Clicking Quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button usually without moving the pointer Clip A clip is a reference to recorded video or audio tracks from a single source and may include timecode If a clip includes both video and audio they must be synchronous A reference to several clips edited together is called a master Deleting a clip will delete its associated material only if that material is not used by another clip or master Clip position Clip position refers to the current location in a clip denoted by timecode Profile Family 367 T Glossary CODEC CODEC is an acronym for Coder Decoder the link between JPEG component parallel digital video and the SCSI 2 channel The CODEC compresses the video data to a rate that is commensurate with the available disk bandwidth Conversely the CODEC decompresses the video data coming from the SCSI 2 channel back to 8 bit component parallel digital video The Profile video disk recorder translates digital video data between CCIR 601 digital component and compressed motion JPEG for storage on hard disk Command line The line that you type to invoke a program or initiate an action A command line usually contains the application program name along with optional arguments known as command line options Composite video A single video signal composed of combined luminance and chrominance information Component v
135. cate replies for BVW BVW insert edit and Odetics for 61 0c CurrentTimeSense for Timer1 LTC and VITC and 61 0c StatusSense nor for Louth for 30 05 PortStatusRequest and 30 10 SystemStatusRequest 3 VdrPort logs record all messages passed between Windows NT and the real time processor The following information is logged Direction indicates NT to video processor indicates video processor to NT VDR port number 0 3 Tick count msec since Windows NT booted Message The start of the VdrPort log file contains the date and time year month day hours min sec msec and the equivalent tick count Events are logged to two files VdrPortLog 000 and VdrPortLog 001 Profile Family 213 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities Log Capture Tool The Profile Log Capture Tool is used to capture Profile logs and package them in zip format to be sent to Grass Valley Group To start the Log Capture tool double click the Log Tool icon on the Windows NT desktop choose Start Run and enter C profile logstool exe in the text entry field or enter start logstool on a command line When you start the log capture tool it compresses the current set of Profile logs and launches the log set selection screen Figure 107 You can choose the current set of logs or one of the last four log sets captured Clicking the Cancel button cleans up any temporary files and exits the program If you click Cancel while copying and compressing when t
136. ces index 1 DComponentVideolInA index 2 DComponentVideolOutA 02 00 S 03 00 Next line is for an MPEG Encoder 12 00 18000000 422 11 520 6 262 01 02 CD DComponentVideolOutA E to E 01 03 CD MpegEnc 1 Record 18000000 0 420 1 1 52 18000000 0 422 1 1 52 18000000 0 420 1 1 52 18000000 0 422 1 1 52 index 3 MpegEnc 1 Default connect DComponentVideolInA to indexl to index2 Default connect DComponentVideolInA to indexl to index3 Sample Configuration Files Audio Resources 00 00 index 4 Audio Chan 1 Input 00 01 index 5 Audio Chan 2 Input 00 02 index 6 Audio Chan 3 Input 00 03 index 7 Audio Chan 4 Input 10 00 index 8 Audio Chan 1 Output 10 01 index 9 Audio Chan 2 Output 10 02 index 10 Audio Chan 3 Output 10 03 index 11 Audio Chan 4 Output Timecode Resources 04 00 S index 12 LTCInl 07 00 index 13 LTCOutl 05 00 S index 14 DComponentVITCLInA 08 00 index 15 DComponentVITClOutA 09 00 index 16 TCRec 1 09 01 index 17 TCRec 2 12 13 CD Default connect LTCIn1 to LTCOutl 12 16 CD Default connect LTCIn1 to TCRec 1 16 13 CS Scheduled connect TCRec 1 to LTCOutl 14 15 CD Default connect DComponentVITC1InA to DComponentVITClOutA 14 17 CD Default connect DComponentVITC1InA to TCRec 2 17 15 C
137. chine name again and add the characters _fc0 Here is an example 192 168 99 1 PROFILE1 192 168 100 1 PROFILE1 fcO 192 168 99 2 PROFILE2 192 168 100 2 PROFILE2 fc0 Profile Family 247 Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking 248 2 Add these lines to the hosts file and remove any other lines which might conflict with them All lines beginning with a are comments and can be ignored The hosts file will look something like this Copyright c 1993 1995 Microsoft Corp This is a sample HOSTS file used by Microsoft TCP IP for Windows NT This file contains the mappings of IP addresses to host names Each entry should be kept on an individual line The IP address should be placed in the first column followed by the corresponding host name The IP address and the host name should be separated by at least one space Additionally comments such as these may be inserted on individual lines or following the machine name denoted by a symbol For example 102 54 94 97 rhino acme com source server 38 25 63 10 x acme com x client host 192 168 99 1 PROFILE1 192 168 100 1 PROFILE1_fc0 192 168 99 2 PROFILE2 192 168 100 2 PROFILE2 fc0 3 Save the file in Notepad and exit 4 Reboot your Profile unit 5 Copy the new hosts file onto the other machine to save you editing it again Profile Family Testing the Fibre Channel Network Testing the Fibre Channel Network Once both Profile machines are back up and running
138. code inputs can be connected to timecode recorders for recording onto disk Timecode generators below timecode inputs represent timecode generators used by the panels Timecode generators can be connected to timecode recorders for recording onto disk or to timecode outputs Profile Family Setting Timecode Crosspoints Timecode outputs top right corner represent either LTC output connectors on the back panel or VITC output signals Timecode outputs can be connected to timecode recorders for playback of recorded material from disk to timecode inputs or to timecode generators pa Select Window Timecode Crosspoint to open the Timecode Crosspoint dialog box The green boxes indicate the current connections For example a green box at the intersection of TCRec 1 and GenlockVITC InA J16 indicates the timecode signal from the back panel input is recorded by timecode recorder 1 Timecode Crosspoint LTCiiJi6 SDFVTCInAJIT SDHCIBJIT SDHVITCInAkJ8 SDIVITCInBJ8 GenLockVITC InA amp JT8 Panel A TC Gen di Panel B TC Gen 2 Panel C TC Gen 3 Panel D TC Gen 4 TCGendb TCGeni amp TCGeni TCGen 8 o ai ubt but mtl ete sbebotal eet ea 6015 Ta Te Te TF al Tak as CES El Erm FE FF tm Ei O a LL NP AG a Gal kah a oc peat ebat GG ml but 9 a mka nak SSL Bret ater bab bak SEG aE eh are ubl IE SUE ek HE a L G
139. cognize the pixel High allows more motion than Low For the current analog composite card click Enable Clamp Speed to enable it Clamp speed sets the reaction to changing DC levels of the input signal Speed can be either slow or fast The fast clamp speed is more reactive to small DC variations The slow speed ignores short term DC level changes but gradually changes the clamping level to track the input For clamp speed on earlier cards click Adaptive Slow Medium or Fast under the Clamp Speed group Fast and Slow settings are the same for both the earlier and current cards while Medium is a compromise between Fast and Slow Adaptive uses the best clamp for the current video input Clamp Speed also helps with white noise reduction Adaptive is the best choice for white noise reduction Do not use Adaptive for impulse noise use Slow and the Impulse Noise Detection option from the Noise Reduction group NOTE If you set AGC audio gain control to automatic on the main screen clamp speed cannot be selected For current analog composite cards the Vertical Interval controls set how vertical interval signals are handled Move the Group Definition slider to set how many lines are in Groups 1 and 2 In Group 1 Notch and Pass are available while Blank and Pass are available in Group 2 Notch applies notch filtering to the vertical interval video line This means that chrominance information and any luminance around the chroma subcarri
140. cords media and performs simple cuts only edits It also allows you to create a sequence of clips called a master The optional List Manager allows you to set up simple station automation The Resource Manager allocates video audio and timecode resources for the Tool Box Editor the List Manager and Time Delay TimeDelay also optional allows you to delay a video feed by a specific amount of time Other Profile utilities include Profile Log via WinTail ProLink and PortServer among others NOTE This manual assumes that you are familiar with basic Microsoft Windows operation Profile Family 17 T Preface 18 Related Documentation Several manuals related to the Profile Family User Manual include On line manuals You can access on line help for an application at any time by choosing Help Help Topics Profile System Version 2 5 Release Notes Profile PDR200 amp PDR300 Installation Manual PLS20 Library System Manual PLS200 Library System Manual PRS200 A RAID Storage Instruction Manual PRS250 RAID Storage Instruction Manual PDX 103 Disk Expansion Unit Installation Manual PDX 206 Disk Expansion Chassis Instruction Manual PRC 100 Profile Control Panel User Manual Microsoft Windows NT user documentation Profile Family Terminology and Conventions Terminology and Conventions Button graphical Buttons shown in bold OK for example that you click Button mouse Choosing Comman
141. cted the Field Setup panel is the only panel available Profile Family 325 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Resource Manager B010278 Rh Channel B El Track 1 JPEG e us Figure 157 Field Frame Setup controls 326 Profile Family Configuring Audio Resources Configuring Audio Resources Configuring audio resources for a channel involves adding one or more audio tracks to the channel and selecting an audio input for each track When you select the audio input for the track the corresponding output is automatically selected For instance if you select AES EBU In1 J5 for your input AES EBU Outl J5 is automatically selected as the output Likewise if you select an output the corresponding input is automatically selected To configure audio resources 1 Select the audio Track icon in the configuration tree With the Crosspoints button selected the Audio Input and Output check boxes appear at the bottom of the Resource Manager dialog box see Figure 158 85 Channel A Name Type Add Channel Channel 4 Player Recorder pat Remove Channel 8 Channel A lg video Il Track 1 JPEG Audio Qj Track 1 Qj Track 2 la Timecode bat Maa Track 1 Delete Track Configuration for Audio Track 1 Audio Codec audio 1 Audio Input Audio Dutputfs pi AES EBU In245 AES EBU Dut24 5 AES EBU In345 AES EBU Dui345 AES EBU In445 AES EBU
142. ctor and Ch 02 refers to the second connector and so forth Analog Audio Outputs J12 Outputs 1 4 Figure 36 Analog Audio Output dialog box Main tab 2 Click the Main tab if it is not already visible 3 Click in the box of the output channel whose name you want to change A channel name can have up to 30 characters 4 After you have changed channel name s click Close or another tab Profile Family 89 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager To change line modes for the XLR connectors 1 In the Analog Audio Output dialog box click the Line Mode tab Figure 37 Analog Audio Outputs J12 Outputs 1 4 A k T i f x f Me ely lal be Le Figure 37 Analog Audio Output dialog box Line Mode tab 2 In the Line Mode box you have three options Balanced default unbalanced Pin 2 Low or unbalanced Pin 3 Low The illustrations of the XLR connectors to the left of the box give visual cues of the selected mode 3 After choosing a line mode or modes click Close or another tab 90 Profile Family Analog Audio Output To trim the line level 1 In the Analog Audio Output dialog box click the Line Level tab Figure 38 Analog Audio Outputs 1 4 Board J12 Main Line Mode Line Level Ch 01 Ch 02 Ch 03 Ch 04 Group Fader Figure 38 Analog Audio Outputs dialog box Line Level tab 2 The line level range is 12
143. d PLS200 Profile Library Systems PRC100 Profile Control Panel unit LVS100 Live Controller Profile VideoGateway CD ROM Drive Profile Tool Box Editor software Profile Tool Box List Manager software Profile TimeDelay application software 22 Profile Family Table 1 PDR 100 and PDR200 300 features compared Feature PDR100 PDR200 300 Video inputs Analog composite component analog CAV serial digital component Analog composite component analog CAV serial digital component Video channels JPEG CODECs 2 or 4 play record channels 2 or 4 play record channels Video channels MPEG encoders and decoders None 1 or 2 record channels encoders 4 6 or 8 playback channels decoders Optional PDR200 Standard PDR300 Disk drives Up to eight 4 GB SCSI Up to eight 9 GB Ultra SCSI Audio Up to 16 channels 16 bit analog standard digital embedded optional 625 only 16 channels digital standard AES EBU embedded up to 32 channels possible analog optional Digital audio interfaces None XLR216 BNC216 Analog audio interfaces XLR100 PAC208 8 channel PAC216 16 channel Internal storage at 24 Mb s 3 hours 6 hours JPEG 12 hours MPEG Mainframe bandwidth 24 Mb s 30 Mb s Ethernet 10 100 BaseT 10 100 BaseT Video network Fibre Channel upgradeable Fibre Channel ready RS 422 protocols Profile Louth Odetics BVW Profile Louth Od
144. dB 278 Profile Family Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts The Tool Box Editor automatically programs a number of keyboard shortcuts Table 15 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts Shortcut Key Command Fl Activate Channel 1 F2 Activate Channel 2 F3 Activate Channel 3 F4 Activate Channel 4 F9 Select video F11 Select audio F12 EE toggle j Reverse Play h Rewind Fast Forward l Play n Record SPACE or k Stop i Create Mark In o Create Mark Out q Modify Mark In w Modify Mark Out u User Mark comma Previous Frame left period Next Frame right Left Arrow Previous Frame left Shift Left Arrow Jump Back 10 Frames Right Arrow Next Frame right Shift Right Arrow Jump Forward 10 Frames a Previous Event S Next Event Ctrl H Select trim handle head Ctrl T Select trim handle tail Z Trim left 1 frame Profile Family 279 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor 280 Table 15 Tool Box Editor Keyboard Shortcuts Shortcut Key Command X Trim right 1 frame Shift z Trim left 10 frames Shift x Trim right 10 frames 1 Give focus to current position timecode 2 Give focus to Duration timecode 3 Give focus to Mark in timecode 4 Give focus to Mark out timecode 7 Give focus to Fader Level 8 Give focus to Shuttle Rate
145. de 36 239 Update Firmware 36 237 Updating a cartridge 144 User mark 270 Using 211 V Validating a list 293 Profile Family VDR Panel shortcut keys 186 VdrPanel 34 159 VdrPort logs 213 Vertical Interval 60 70 Video channels 23 crosspoints 175 Gain 69 input 23 input and output 320 Video disk recorder server 379 Video interface 379 Video network 23 241 Video resources configuring 316 Video router 24 379 Viewing columns 290 VITC 41 165 177 331 379 erase 75 Generator Setting 74 reader setting 48 VITC detection 26 Volume 105 113 204 379 VTR 21 24 253 W Window Open Panel 172 Timecode Crosspoint 179 Video Crosspoint 175 Windows NT 3 51 32 Windows NT 4 0 32 Windows NT desktop 31 WinTail 36 209 211 Index X XLR 216 Digital Interface chassis 26 83 Z Zooming the edit timeline 273 Profile Family 393 Index 394 Profile Family
146. deo boards installed from left to right as represented at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window For example a system that does not use all four available clock references might be configured like this In this specific example shown in Table 4 you have one analog composite board and one component analog board The panel in the tab shows System Video Input 1 and Video Input 2 Table 4 Configuration example two video input clocking sources Board Board T Board T In lock Referen oard Tag oard Type Reference put Clock Reference Vid I CAV Component analog video 1 Video Input 1 Vid I Cmpst Analog composite video 1 Video Input 2 In the next example a system that uses all four available clock references might be configured with two serial digital component boards In this specific example shown in Table 5 the panel in the tab shows System Video Input 1 Video Input 2 Video Input 3 and Video Input 4 Profile Family 97 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 98 Table 5 Configuration example four video input clocking sources Board Board Tag Board Type Reference Input Clock Reference Vid I O SDI VA Serial digital component 1 and 2 Video Input 1 Video Input 2 Vid I O SDI VA Serial digital component and2 Video Input 3 Video Input 4 Profile Family Audio Signal Processing Board 1 J6 system fel System System System system Cl System
147. detect pr ropas AGC n ER ME 3 Fom mo y 24 Default 100 from normal Close Orde Heb Figure 13 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab B 2 If you prefer enter a new name for the input signal in the Name box For example if the signal is a network feed you could rename it to Network Feed The VITC name the window title bar and the configuration tree name change automatically as you enter the new name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Select a video standard Click either NTSC with pedestal NTSC without pedestal or PAL PAL is available only with earlier cards If you change the standard restart all tools that use this channel The board can accept only one input at a time 4 If you use Automatic VITC Detect the Profile unit uses the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC signals If Automatic VITC Detect is not checked the system expects to find the VITC signals on the VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 12 If the signal is found the VITC Present status indicator is turned on NOTE Input must be auto timed to use automatic VITC detection Profile Family 53 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager If you want video input auto timed click Enable Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is sy
148. drive in the Drive box Profile Family Loading and Playing a Clip 5 Select the clip to load Richter in this example see Figure 92 6 Click OK 7 Click the Play button in the selected Panel dialog box to begin playing the clip 8 The Normal Loop and Bounce modes determine how play back occurs Normal mode plays the selected clip or clip list to the end freezing on the last field of the clip or of the last clip in the list Loop plays the selected clip or clip list continuously looping back to the beginning of the clip when the clip ends or in the case of a clip list looping back to the first clip in the list when the last clip ends Bounce mode plays the selected clip or clip list continuously until at the end of the clip it plays the clip in reverse or in the case of a clip list it plays to the end of the clip list then reverses the sequence playing all the clips in reverse order Load Clip Ea Drive INT1 default S Clips DIU Figure 92 Load Clip dialog box Profile Family 193 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Renaming a Clip To rename a clip 1 Choose VideoClip Rename Clip The Rename Video Clip dialog box appears Drive INT1 default Y Rename To Intuition Cancel Figure 93 Rename Video Clip dialog box 2 If the clip you want to rename is in a different list select it from the Drive box 3 Select a clip from the Rename box The clip name app
149. ds Clicking Ctrl key Double clicking Dragging Moving Pointer Pointing Right click Shift key with the mouse pointer The two or three buttons on the top of the mouse Choosing menu items File Exit for example File Exit means choose the Exit menu item under the File menu Commands a 1setup for example are shown in bold Pressing and releasing the mouse button without moving the pointer Hold Ctrl down while pressing other keys in a sequence Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice without moving the pointer Pressing and holding the mouse button while moving the pointer Changing the location of the pointer on the screen by moving the mouse An arrow or other graphic on the screen indicating the current cursor position for selecting or clicking Positioning the pointer on an object on the display by moving the mouse Pressing and holding the right mouse button Hold Shift down while pressing other keys in a sequence Profile Family 19 T Preface 20 Profile Family Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family The Profile PDR 100 Video Disk Recorder and the Profile PDR 200 and PDR 300 Video File Servers store broadcast quality motion JPEG or MPEG PDR200 and PDR300 only video and CD quality audio on computer disk drives rather than on video tape allowing almost instant access to any timecode location of your video and audio material A Profile system is more than just
150. during the conversion with a few seconds delay from the source media 9 If there is media in the list that you have decided not to convert select it in the media pane then click Remove 10 If you want to delete the original clip or master automatically after it is converted click Delete source after conversion This will save disk space 134 Profile Family Using the Transcode Utility NOTE A deleted clip or master cannot be restored 11 Click Start The Transcode Description dialog box appears Enter a descriptive message to be stored as part of the transcode history and when done click OK to continue the conversion Transcode Description x Enter Description Figure 61 The Transcode Description dialog box The conversion starts with the first clip or master in the list and continues to the last If the media are not deleted see step 10 the source clips and masters are moved to a backup bin For example if the source media is in the default bin the original source is moved to a bin called default bak bin basename plus bak You can stop the conversion process at any time by clicking Stop Start the process again by clicking Restart NOTE An error occurs listed in the Status column when a clip is the wrong video standard is already present in the bak bin or cannot be opened among other faults 12 Click Close or choose File Exit Profile Family 135 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Transcode U
151. e tbxedit exe myproject tbx To create a new project file Choose File New You are asked to save the current project file if necessary and then if you are connected to a local machine the Tool Box Editor caches media and is set up using a default configuration If you are connected remotely you are also asked which machine to connect to in the Connect to Machine dialog box To save an existing project file under a different name e Choose File Save As Profile Family 257 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Connecting to a Remote Profile Machine You can connect from your local machine to any remote Profile machine in your network A local Profile machine refers to a Profile system to which you are directly attached A remote Profile machine refers to a Profile system that is connected to your local system via an Ethernet local area network LAN To connect to a remote Profile machine 1 Choose File Remote Machine The Connect to Machine dialog box appears The label Local appears after the name of the local Profile machine Connect to Machine Machine name PROFILEB Local Cancel Figure 119 Remote Machine dialog box To connect a Profile machine from the network host list 1 Select the name of the machine in list box 2 Click Connect 3 The Connecting to Machine dialog box is displayed If the connection is unsuccessful you are given the opportunity to retry the connection or to cancel the operati
152. e use the same number for both 74 Profile Family Serial Digital Component Video Output If VITC Erase Enable is selected it removes any VITC that may have been recorded previously Without enabling VITC erase previous VITC may or may not be overwritten so it is best to enable it The range of lines is determined by the Start and End values 4 Under Timing Adjustment you can set the timing of each output with respect to the reference genlock internal reference timing which in turn is set with respect to the external reference input house black With the reference genlock timing set to the factory default of 0 the outputs have an adjustment range of 2 5 lines to 148 lines of delay The Fine delay is in pixels and the Line delay is in lines 5 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 6 Click Close to accept the changes Profile Family 75 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Serial Digital Component Video Output Advanced To change error detection settings for serial digital video output 1 Click the Advanced tab to view the Serial Digital Component Video Output Advanced settings see Figure 26 Digital Component Video Output J5 A SDI OutA J5 Figure 26 Serial Digital Video Output dialog box Advanced tab 2 Click Insert EDH Packets to insert Full Frame CRC and Active Picture CRC into the video stream 3 Click Blank Ancillary Data to insert anc
153. e 147 An example of a log file The Scheduled Duration field shows the value entered in the On air List It does not show the actual duration of the event The times shown in the Start Time and End Time fields are actual times which can be used to calculate the event duration The List Name field shows the name of the original list containing that event which subsequently was Scheduled and became part of the On air List When the log file reaches about four megabytes in length the information in the file is moved to a new file called evntsch1 log and kept as an archive This ensures that evntsch log always contains current information but keeps its size manageable Subsequent archived information will be stored in evntsch2 log evntsch3 log and so on Profile Family Chapter 1 0 Using the Resource Manager The Resource Manager lets you assign system video audio and timecode resources and configure operational settings for one or more Profile channels These resources are used by the Tool Box Editor List Manager and Time Delay Resource Manager B010278 89 Channel A y Video 3 4 Audio Track 1 i Track 2 EM Timecode C 3 Track 1 Figure 148 Resource Manager dialog box Profile Family 313 T Chapter 10 314 Using the Resource Manager The channel resources that you can configure with Resource Manager include Video inputs and outputs Video codecs JPEG Video encoders and decoders MPEG Audio
154. e 264 Capturing clips 253 Cartridge properties 150 Cartridge Tape 367 CCIR 601 24 CD player 253 CD ROM 367 Changing configuration files 221 Channel 367 Channels audio 277 Checksums 244 Chroma 367 Chroma Gain 69 Profile Family Chroma Phase 69 Chroma Reduction 58 Chroma sampling 170 Cleaning Cartridge 367 Cleanup Media 269 Clip 367 archiving 137 capture 266 capturing 253 clip list 198 define 190 delete 122 197 drag and drop 269 edit a list 199 eject 192 197 group 198 load 192 lock 195 long names 196 new 190 play 193 269 protect 195 record 266 renaming 121 194 restoring from archive 138 short names 196 striping 196 subclip 270 trimming 269 unlock 195 Clip length BVW 164 Clip list 198 Clip marks 164 Clip Name Box 185 Clip position 367 Clip Position Bar 184 Closing an application 32 Cluster 208 CODEC 23 24 173 175 368 Collapsing the media tree 112 Column width 311 COMI and COM2 163 Comb 36 Command Line 368 Comment column 291 Communications port 163 Component video 368 Composite video 368 Compression 23 169 368 Configuration file editing 221 Configuration files 39 Configuration Manager 33 37 Configuration tree 38 Configuration PRC 100 217 Configuration ProLink 211 217 Configuring Audio Resources 327 Setting the audio window size 329 Configuring Resources 315 Configuring resources RS 422 217 Configuring Timecode Resources 330 configuring TimeDelay resources 346 Configuring Vid
155. e 289 5 Continue adding clips or masters by dragging them onto the list List Manager will perform the events at the scheduled time After adding a few events your list should look similar to the one shown in Figure 136 Profile Family 287 Chapter9 Using the List Manager List Manager PROFILE18 5 x File Edit View Project Options Help Ce pi see Monitor J Channel A Channel B View Channel A JPEG Name Start Time Duration Comment Figure 136 A basic playback list 288 Profile Family Changing Event Settings Changing Event Settings List Manager establishes default settings for each event as you drop material into the window You can move from event to event in the list with the up and down arrow keys You can customize the event by editing the property settings in the list You can also edit property settings by double clicking on the left end of the row then changing settings in the edit boxes of the properties dialog box that appears The dialog box for play event properties is shown in Figure 137 Play Event Properties NT1 default 1 14 50 54 13 00 00 12 19 hee m 1271613 j No End Date Time Figure 137 Play event properties dialog box Profile Family 289 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager By default the list displays five columns Status Name Start Time Duration and Comment A label at the top of each column except Status identifies t
156. e 49 If you click on a button the tree hierarchy is expanded or opened so you can see the branch For example under a volume you see bins Clicking on the button collapses or closes the associated branch of the tree hiding the bins under the volume To explore the contents of an item select the icon representing it and then choose Explore from the shortcut menu which is displayed with a right click If present clips and masters are displayed in the contents pane In this pane you see information about the media The name of the clip or master The length of the media in the form 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames The compression format of the media JPEG or MPEG The date and time the media was last modified in the format 12 2 94 9 40 PM Month Day Year Hours Minutes AM PM Profile Family Viewing the Media Hierarchy Ca Untitled Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help cox o3 Profile Network 3 CDX 03 Local INT1 gg default gy default back 9 ProfileT oolboxT emp E Recycled So glam Ao Ao sien sien o Ao to sion sion Bo Figure 49 The Media Manager tree pane The icons shown in tree pane are explained in more detail here xt The Profile network icon is the root for all other items in the tree pane 8 Profile machines Each icon is labeled with the Profile machine s name A Profile can be a local machine or one connected
157. e File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also select the clip s name a second time Type the new name and press Enter NOTE The renaming operation does not take permanent effect until after an update operation see Updating and Inventorying Cartridges on page 144 Profile Family 139 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Deleting an Archived Clip To delete an archived clip 1 In the tree pane select the library cartridge and partition where the archived clip is stored 2 In the contents pane select the archived clip or clips you want to delete 3 Press the Delete or Backspace key or choose Delete from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click When an archived clip is deleted it is not moved to the Recycle bin It is removed from the library database s record of archived clips Also since tape is not arandom access medium the storage space is not reclaimed as it is on the disk drives and the space cannot be reused until all clips in a partition have been deleted NOTE The delete operation does not take effect until after an Update operation see Updating and Inventorying Cartridges on page 144 Importing a Cartridge To import a cartridge is to insert or add it into the library system 1 In the tree pane select the library icon If you have a stand alone drive you must insert the cartridge you are importing into the drive 2 Choose Import either from the
158. e Out Mark button removes the out mark and restores the clip to its last available field The Group Name box lists the name of the current clip list Profile Family Panel Basics 22 The Go to Clip End button jumps to the end of the current clip You can also press e 23 The Forward One Field button moves the current clip position forward one field You can also press the key In addition Shift advances the clip position 10 fields or 5 frames and Ctrl advances the clip position 100 fields or 50 frames 24 The Back One Field button moves the current clip position backward one field You can also press the key In addition Shift reverses the clip position 10 fields or 5 frames and Ctrl lt reverses the clip position 100 fields or 50 frames 25 The Goto Clip Beginning button jumps to the beginning of the current clip You can also press t 26 The Shuttle Bar sets the shuttle rate Use the mouse to drag the pointer to the desired shuttle rate displayed in the Shuttle Rate box When you click on the shuttle bar the disk recorder enters shuttle mode You can also press h 27 The Shuttle Rate box displays the current shuttle rate This number ranges from 16 00 to 416 00 with the positive numbers indicating forward motion negative numbers reverse and 0 00 still This number can be set by clicking on the Shuttle Rate box to open the Shuttle Rate dialog box entering a shuttle rate and clicking OK
159. e Profile Software Development Kit SDK provides an application programming interface API for libraries of Profile functions We recommend that you call these functions via Microsoft Visual C 5 0 however it is possible to use other languages that permit calls to C declared functions contact your Grass Valley Group representative for more information Software developers can use the API to control the Profile from third party hardware devices for example The API consists of seven libraries The TekCfg library provides an interface to the Profile configuration The TekPdr library furnishes calls that inventory and manage movies in Common Movie Format CMF an internal file format standard for video audio and timecode The TekRem library makes it possible for a remote Windows NT system to control a Profile disk recorder over an Ethernet LAN The TekVdr library provides an interface for playing and recording video and audio clips The TekVfs library supports low level access to individual media files in the media file system The TekV me library controls the optional video mix effects board The TekXfr library supports media streaming of Fibre Channel connections Eight RS 422 serial ports come standard on a disk recorder A disk recorder can issue serial commands or receive them from an external device via RS 422 communication lines The Profile Protocol associates each API call with a specific number that can be
160. e configuration tree and then click or double click a monitor output from the list such as Monitor Out J12 The Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box appears see Figure 23 Analog Composite Monitor Output J12 A Monitor OutA J12 Main Burn in Time Code Name Monitor Outa J1 2 T Show Text Text Layout DID 4 C Cn ON Large Font C Small Font Dim C Bright 10 TransparentBkg C Opaque Bkg 12 Clear Display oe TET Figure 23 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Main tab 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name For example you could rename it to Monitor Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Click Show Text to display text on an attached monitor Displaying text on a monitor is good way to help identify where the output is coming from 4 Under Text Layout you can select either a small or large font a dim or bright white character display and a transparent or opaque background for the lettering With the small font you get twelve lines and twenty four columns with the large you get six lines and thirteen columns Profile Family 71 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 5 To enter text click in the text entry box and start typing where you want the text displayed on the monitor Legal characte
161. e is divided into an number of partitions Media may be added to a partition until that partition is full Deleting media from one partition does not affect any other partition Parameter A variable that is given a specific value This value is passed to a program before execution Pixel The smallest part of a display memory that can be addressed Playback Playback is the act of playing a clip track or master loaded on a machine at any rate Playback delay The amount of time that the playback channel is behind the record channel Pointer The pointer allows you to make selections in menus to size and position windows and icons and to select the window where you want to send the input The window manager such as Windows NT determines the shape of the pointer See Pointing Device Pointing device Typically a mouse tablet or some other device with effective dimensional motion See Pointer Port A physical connection such as a multi pin connector or coaxial connector and its associated firmware that permits one computing device to communicate data and control information with another computing or peripheral device Profile Family 375 T Glossary P Picture A P picture is a predictive picture used in MPEG video compression MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is it reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame A P picture relies on data from forward moving
162. e mouse pointer is over the desired clip and hold the button down 2 Drag the master to the edit timeline and release the left mouse button NOTE Masters cannot be loaded onto the capture timeline 276 Profile Family Using the Audio Controls Using the Audio Controls The Tool Box Editor lets you gain access to up to 32 channels of audio Each audio channel consists of an audio channel record selector button and an audio metering section The audio metering section contains an input indicator an overload indicator and from left to right tick marks to indicate decibel levels an input gain level indicator an audio level bar meter and an output gain level indicator Audio Channel Record Selectors nita Input Indicator Decibel Level Overload Indicator Audio Meters Output Gain Level Audio Fader Input Gain Level PARE uc Scale Increase Decrease Output Gain Adjustment Input Gain Adjustment Unity Figure 132 Audio controls Profile Family 277 T Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor The overload indicator lights if the audio level is above the highest level of the meter The input gain level audio level and output gain level use the same metering scale The metering scale is a 4 0 dB meter scale 0 corresponds to 4 0 dB and ranges from 14 dB to 40 dB 18 dB to 56 dB full scale At the top of the four audio meters are the audio channel record selector buttons
163. e na Edit Figure 117 Tool Box Editor window 254 Profile Family Starting and Exiting the Tool Box Editor You can start the Tool Box Editor from a command line provided that c profile is in the path by typing tbxedit exe You can also specify a project file name when you start the Tool Box Editor from a command line tbxedit exe myproject tbx You can start Tool Box Editor while also connecting to a named Profile unit on the network tbxedit exe m profile7 NOTE You cannot specify both a project file and a remote Profile machine in a command line at the same time Whenever you start the Tool Box Editor a Hardware Communication Monitor is also started if it is not already running This program keeps track of the Profile host file profile hst which lists Profile systems on the network as well as remoting activities Hardware Communication Monitor Commands Number of Connections 1 Figure 118 Hardware Communication message box Profile Family 255 T Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor The Hardware Communication Monitor tries to connect to a machine in the project file see Project Files on 257 If there is no project file present you will automatically connect to the local machine Otherwise you will go to the Connect to Machine dialog box see Figure 119 To exit the Tool Box Editor Choose File Close A message box is displayed asking you to confirm that you really want to exit
164. e pane is on the left and the contents pane is on the right What appears in the contents pane depends on what you select in the tree pane For example if you select the volume icon INT in the tree pane the Recycled and default bins appear in the contents pane If you select a bin the masters and clips in that bin appear in the contents pane Masters and clips will only appear in the contents pane A Untitled Media Manager File Edit View Tools Help ago FH ej mee xcs ad Contents of CDX_03 INT1 default pes Profile Network Name Format Modified um id Local 45i 1 00 00 05 20 MPEG 03 02 98 07 47 AM G3 defaut 45 2 00 00 05 15 MPEG 03 02 98 05 15 PM Ga default back i Clip 00 00 33 25 JPEG 03 03 98 04 55 PM Ga ProfileT oolboxT emp Clip 00 00 04 25 JPEG 03 03 98 04 21 PM E Recycled Clip2 00 00 13 15 JPEG 03 03 98 04 24 PM 45i Clip3 00 00 06 13 JPEG 03 04 98 10 24 AM Clip4 00 00 04 19 JPEG 03 03 98 05 07 PM 4 Clips 00 00 01 15 JPEG 03 04 98 09 48 AM 45 Clip 00 00 04 13 JPEG 03 04 98 10 24 AM Clip 00 00 05 00 JPEG 03 03 98 04 32 PM Clips 00 00 00 01 JPEG 03 04 98 12 19 PM Clip3 00 00 03 09 JPEG 03 04 98 10 27 AM 45i Clip10 00 00 09 22 JPEG 03 04 98 12 19 PM ad 00 00 02 27 JPEG 03 03 98 04 32 PM Ii ipeg4 00 00 10 25 MPEG 03 02 98 02 21 PM i LTCSource 00 00 34 14 JPEG 03 02 98 05 54 PM S Master 00 00 07 12 JPEG 03 04 98 12 21 PM S Master2 00 00 11 116 JPEG 03 03 98
165. e that is scheduled e If an event s end time overlaps an absolute event start time that event is shortened so that the absolute event starts on time Rule 2 An approximate event always cues if it is the next event in the time line Acued approximate event is de cued 150 frames prior to the start time of an absolute event see rule 1 Approximate events remain in the list during their aging process The aging process allows approximate events to stay cued past their start time Allow at least fifteen seconds for a channel to switch between record and playback The 15 second gap is used in the following manner 5 seconds for queuing 5 seconds for de queuing and 5 seconds to account for transition gap Allow at least 10 seconds between starting a recording on one channel and playing that clip on another channel The 10 second delay allows the material to exist at least 5 seconds prior to queue time In the situations described here use absolute events rather than approximate events because the rules for approximate events allow them to exceed the constraints 296 Profile Family Using a Live Feed Using a Live Feed To further automate station operation you can integrate live feeds into your lists For example you may want to broadcast a live event inserting stored commercials at appropriate times 1 Open the list that you want to add a live event to 2 Choose File New Event Switch and the New Switch Event dia
166. e tree The bin name is highlighted so you can change it Accept the new bin name by pressing Enter NOTE Renaming a bin involves modifying the path of every clip or master in the bin to reflect the new name If a clip or master cannot be renamed because it is locked or in use you end up with two bins one with the old name and one with the new one The clip that could not be modified remains in the bin with the old name Profile Family Renaming Clips and Masters To rename a bin Select the bin in either the tree or contents pane Choose Rename from either the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also select the bin a second time The name of the bin is highlighted Type a new name for the bin and press Enter NOTE Deleting a bin involves deleting every clip or master currently in the bin If a clip or master cannot be deleted because it is locked or in use the bin is not deleted either it will only contain those clips or masters that could not be deleted The rest go to the Recycle bin or are deleted directly To delete a bin 1 2 3 Select the bin or bins in either the tree or contents pane Press Delete Backspace choose Edit Delete or with a right click choose Delete from the shortcut menu Press Shift Delete to skip the Recycle bin and delete the bin or bins immediately The bin icon disappears from the tree and the contents of the bin are moved to the Recycle bin
167. e trim handles appear select the clip while it is on the edit timeline see Figure 131 You can drag the trim handles to the left or right to make the clips shorter or longer to the limit of the beginning and ending of the source material Figure 131 Trim handles on the edit timeline As you trim a clip the current channel output plays source material from the trim position rather than the current time position Timecode for the trim position is shown at the bottom of the timeline with the amount of time added or removed from the clip below that A few keyboard shortcuts are available for trimming Select trim handle head Ctrl h e Select trim handle tail Ctrl t Trim left 10 frames Shift z Trim left 1 frame z Trim right 1 frame x Trim right 10 frames Shift x 274 Profile Family Creating a New Master Creating a New Master A master is a sequence of clips To create a new master 1 Click on the New Master button on the current bin toolbar The New Master dialog box appears You can also drag clips to the empty edit timeline from the current bin 2 Enter the name of the new master in the New Master text box or simply accept the default The default name is always unique 3 Click on the OK button The name of the new empty master appears above the edit timeline Adding Media to a Master A newly created master is empty You can assemble a master by inserting clips or even other masters into it
168. ears in the To box 4 Edit the current name or delete the name and enter a new one Clip names can have up to 32 characters Spaces and uppercase characters are acceptable however uppercase and lowercase characters will not distiguish clip names 5 Click OK 194 Profile Family Setting Clip Protection Setting Clip Protection To set clip read only protection 1 Choose VideoClip Set Clip Protection and the Set Clip Protection dialog box appears Set Clip Protection INT NTJdefaug CJ n Figure 94 Set Clip Protection dialog box 2 If the clip you want to protect is in a different list select it from the Drive box 3 To protect a clip select a clip in the Play Record box and then click Protected The clip is now protected as read only 4 To unprotect or unlock a clip select a clip in the Read Only box and then click Unprotected The clip is no longer protected 5 Click OK Profile Family 195 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Striping a Clip Striping timecode with VdrPanel allows you to complete a striping process faster than real time For example on a traditional VTR it might take you an hour to stripe a one hour clip But with VdrPanel you can stripe a one hour clip in a matter of minutes To stripe timecode on a previously recorded clip 1 Choose VideoClip Stripe Clip and the Stripe Timecode dialog box appears Stripe Time Code Starting time code oo foo foo
169. ecord Clock Source Analag InB J8 C System Clock Analog InC J8 Record Clock Analog InD J8 Close Drda Figure 27 Analog Audio Input dialog box 2 Enter a new name in the Name box For example you could change the signal name from Analog InA J8 to Audio One Signal names can be up to 30 characters long and can include spaces The window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Click System Clock or Record Clock to select the audio record clock source 4 2Related Audio Channels lists the audio channels that are related to the current signal name 5 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box as they were set at the time the dialog box appeared 6 Click Close to accept the changes 78 Profile Family Digital Audio Input Digital Audio Input To open the Digital Audio Input dialog box 1 Select Audio Input from the configuration tree and then click or double click a digital audio name from the list and the Digital Audio Input dialog box appears see Figure 28 Digital Audio Input J8 A SDIAudio InA J8 SDlAudio InA J8 Cite Group fe ES F LESTIE S ES Cito Figure 28 Digital Audio Input dialog box 2 Audio Groups Present shows four status indicators one per audio group The green light indicates that t
170. ectors on the back panel For example video inputs can be connected to JPEG codecs or MPEG encoders for recording onto disk or connected to video output for display Video outputs top right corner represent video output connectors on the back panel For example video outputs can be connected to JPEG codecs or MPEG decoders for playback of recorded material from disk or to video inputs To specify video crosspoints 1 In VdrPanel choose Window Video Crosspoint to open the dialog box The green boxes indicate current connections For example a green box at the intersection of a SDI InA J14 serial digital video board in slot J14 and a Panel A MPEG Rec 1 encoder connects the video signal from the back panel input labeled Video I O Serial Digital Component IN A to an MPEG encoder Profile Family 175 Chapter4 Using VdrPanel Video Crosspoint HI 31 7 T T TTW MTT jagga Ja PEREA EhEbRHE EhEhEhE hehehe akoh aka ekek ekek eke ete Em m ahahaha ekek ekek ekek a e Sree el Stele leh kk Hi aa SE ahahaha ebsESEBESESEBE SbSEsL dk Figure 84 Video Crosspoint dialog box 2 To assign a crosspoint click in the intersection boxes between a video signal and a JPEG codec MPEG encoder or MPEG decoder The selection boxes turn green You can also select a video signal and while holding down the left mouse button stretch a line to the desired resource NOTE Verify that you have the appropriate BNC connectio
171. ed decimal IP address in the box provided Contact your network administrator for an appropriate address The IP address must be different than the Ethernet address for the machine Click Clear to erase an entry Enter a netmask in the box provided A netmask can help speed routing of network traffic Click Clear to erase an entry Based on the address you use for a netmask there is an implicit netmask but you can override this with a larger mask For example 255 0 0 0 can be overridden by 255 255 0 0 or 255 255 255 0 Enter a dotted decimal gateway address in the box provided This is if you have a Profile VideoGateway attached to your network Click Clear to erase an entry Enter a hardware address in the box provided in the range 1 to 120 A hardware address of 0 zero will allow the address to be automatically configured Every Fibre Channel node board on your Profile network must have a unique hardware address Click OK Profile Family 103 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 104 Profile Family Chapter 3 Using Media Manager The Profile Media Manager allows you to have access to digitally stored JPEG and MPEG media and provides tools for managing that media such as explore cut copy paste and delete Media may be stored locally on disk on your Profile unit or it may be on a disk expansion unit RAID system or library system attached to your Profile unit You can also transfer media stor
172. ed on any Profile system on your Profile network via a Fibre Channel connection Digital video and audio media may be stored in volumes A volume is a disk set or file system on one of the following machines PDR100 Professional Video Disk Recorder PDR200 or PDR300 Video File Server PRS200 A or PRS250 Profile RAID Storage system e PDX103 Profile Disk Expansion Chassis PDX208 Profile Disk Expansion Chassis Video and audio clips can also be stored on digital tape cartridges in the PLS20 and PLS 200 Profile Library Systems With Media Manager you view media in a tree structure On disk media may consist of video and audio clips and masters Clips and masters are organized into bins that are kept on a volume A bin is a container for clips and masters similar to a directory on a computer A clip refers to segments or portions of a media file or a media file in its entirety A master is an edited sequence of clips On a cartridge in a library system media also consists of clips and masters Cartridges are divided into one or more partitions NOTE Profile system software version 2 5 supports Media Manager version 1 1 5 Profile Family 105 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Starting and Exiting the Media Manager To start the Media Manager application with Windows NT Double click the Media Manager shortcut icon Or Choose Start PDR Applications Media Manager The Media Manger window appears see Figure 46 The tre
173. elay process If the playback has not started yet the delayed start is canceled Video Audio Status Lights The number of status lights indicates the number of video and audio tracks in the record channel A Video status light turns red when the corresponding video track is not receiving a signal An audio status light turns red when the audio input signal peaks and is clipped Show Hide Meters ButtonExpands the panel to show video and audio meters Video Audio Meters The Playback Panel The video meter shows the record channel s data rate relative to the maximum rate Audio meters show the audio input level in dB Though TimeDelay may have multiple playback panels each has its own set of the following controls Panel Name Playout Delay Timecode Display Profile Family Displays the playback channel name Default playback channel names are Player 1 Player 2 etc You may change the channel name using the Resource Manager The playback panel may shorten long channel names so they fit in the display This edit box shows the amount of time the playback panel waits before playing The minimum playout delay is 5 seconds The maximum delay is 5 seconds less than the current record buffer size The default playout delay is 5 seconds Shows the current timecode source value relative to the position of the playback channel Timecode sources include external VITC and LTC signals internal timecode generators the V
174. en the video disk system video mix effects cards and video I O cards The video router is a 32 x 32 crosspoint matrix capable of full bandwidth 4 2 2 CCIR 601 8 bit digital video The video router allows real time transfer of video throughout the system without impacting overall system performance The video router also makes possible simultaneous record and playback on separate channels A block diagram showing the hardware layout of a PDR 200 or above is shown in Figure 1 on page 27 Video Disk Subsystem In the video disk subsystem video data is compressed and written to up to eight 4 gigabyte PDR 100 only or 9 gigabyte disks and then read from these disks and decompressed This video data is read from and written to the video router in 8 bit parallel component digital video format The video disk subsystem has disk recorder boards PDR 100 and enhanced disk recorder boards PDR 200 and above with an Intel 1960 real time processor and a SCSI 2 interface to the disks The video disk subsystem uses master and slave disk recorder or enhanced disk recorder EDR boards with two SCSI 2 channels on each board The master disk recorder board comes standard with a two channel JPEG codec Bidirectional codec channels allow channels to be configured for recording or 24 Profile Family Video Compression playback By adding a slave disk recorder board a Profile unit becomes a four channel JPEG system The master board has a Intel 1960 rea
175. eo Resources 316 adding a video track 317 selecting video inputs and outputs 320 selecting video quality 317 Controller 161 164 Controls audio 277 Index Copying media in Media Manager 116 Copymovie 251 Create Mark In button 271 Create Mark Out button 271 Creating configuration files 220 Crosspoints timecode 178 video 175 Ctrl key 19 D D to A 369 Data cartridge 368 Data set 204 Date 291 dB 278 368 Decibels 278 Decoders 24 Decoders MPEG 23 Default 369 Default Procamp 69 Defining clips 190 Delete Media 260 Delete vertical interval 61 Deleting an archived clip 140 Deleting clips 197 Deleting media in Media Manager 122 Desktop Windows NT 31 Detail log file 209 Dialog box 369 Digital Audio Input PDR100 79 PDR200 86 Digital audio interfaces 23 Profile Family 383 T Index Digital Audio Output PDR100 82 PDR200 92 Direct Memory Access DMA interface 25 Disk drives 23 Disk Expansion Unit 369 Disk label 205 Disk Utility 34 203 369 Display 369 Dominance field 202 Double clicking 19 Drop frame 370 Drop frame timecode 180 265 Duplicating media in Media Manager 120 Duration 291 Duration in Monitor view 293 E E to E 44 47 183 370 E to E button 266 E to E timed outputs 46 Edit Delete 301 New Event 294 295 Edit presets 168 Edit timeline 273 Edit view in List Manager 282 Edit Window 302 Editing a clip list 199 Editing configuration files 221 Editing lists 300 Editor Tool Box 159 Prof
176. er are removed Profile Family 57 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 58 Pass indicates that the vertical video line is passed through Blank indicated that line the group are blank 5 Under Noise Reduction earlier analog composite cards only the controls enable and set various noise reduction methods Click Enable Luma and Chroma Reduction This applies the Level and Threshold settings to use a feedback noise reduction scheme on the decoded input signals after they have been separated into chrominance and luminance The Level and Threshold sliders determine the amount of weight the feedback signal has in comparison to the input signal The Threshold range takes into consideration the amount of motion in the picture Use the sliders to adjust the ranges Be sure Enable Luma and Chroma Reduction is checked for the reduction values to be applied Click Enable Quiet Line if desired This acts as a noise reference If the Quiet line is noise free the rest of the signal should also be noise free This allows the decoder to not mistake noise for motion If the Quiet Line is enabled the line values for Field 1 and Field 2 are used Use the sliders to setthe line values for each field Click on Default Lines to return to the default values Enable Impulse Noise Reduction automatically filters out noise spikes such as amplifier crackling NOTE If reduction of impulse noise is selected the disk recorder automa
177. er down the Profile unit completely power it up again and then run the program again otherwise just restart the Profile 7 After the program runs successfully restart your disk recorder so the changes can take effect Updating Fibre Channel Microcode Updating Fibre Channel Microcode From time to time it becomes necessary to reprogram microcode on your Fibre Channel board Updating the microcode ensures that software and hardware will properly function together This release provides two versions of Fibre Channel board microcode You must choose which one to use depending on your environment The two versions are Loop compatible This version is loaded on your Fibre Channel board at the factory Use this microcode with Fibre Channel hubs when your Video Network includes only Profile Systems and SGI Fibre Channel Servers You can reload this microcode with the FC Loop mode Microcode icon in the Profile Debug Tools folder Switch compatible Use the FC Switch mode Microcode to load this version of microcode onto your Fibre Channel board if you are connecting your Profile system to a Fibre Channel Switch In addition you must set switch mode on with the fcconfig s on command or with the appropriate check box in Configuration Managers Configure Fibre Channel dialog box You should also use the switch compatible version of microcode if you are connecting your Profile system to Fibre Channel devices from other manufacturers Please n
178. er on PROFILE1 you will only see PROFILE1 1 Choose File Add Remove Machine The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears The Local label follows the name of the current machine PROFILE1 2 Click on the computer name for the other Profile machine you want for example PROFILE2 3 Click Add 4 Click OK For more information on connecting to remote Profile machines see Connecting to a Remote Machine on page 110 You can now copy or move media from one machine to another In addition you can play a clip or master with VdrPanel or Tool Box Editor while the media is being moved or copied to another machine Using the Listnames and Copymovie Commands The listnames command line utility provides a way to list media on a remote Profile without using Media Manager Valid arguments are datasets or volumes groups or lists and media Dataset names are case sensitive That means that INT and int would be considered different datasets The two arguments for listnames are e start arg list media based on a starting argument start arg such as INT If not specified the utility will list all valid datasets volumes rremote machine lists media of a remote machine such as PROFILE1 If not specified the utility searches local machine only This example lists all the valid datasets volumes on the remote machine PROFILE1 listnames r PROFILE1 This one lists all groups clip lists in INT on PROFILE1 listnames r PROFILE1
179. ere is not a limit on the number of VITC lines Click Close to close the Vertical Interval Line Programming dialog box e 2For serial digital component From the Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box set the lines where you want VITC in VITC Generator Linel and VITC Generator Line2 Verify VITC Generator Enable is checked If not click to toggle it Profile Family 43 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 44 Setting the System Timing Q A new factory default PDR 200 or PDR300 is configured so that e All outputs are zero timed to the external reference house black Each input can lock to and record any stable video input whether or not the source is genlocked to an external reference NOTE Serial digital inputs 525 lines on a PDR 100 must be timed manually To adjust system timing 1 Choose Option System Timing or click the System Timing button on the toolbar The System Timing dialog box appears see Figure 7 which shows an example of how the dialog box looks when the outputs are zero timed by default he red line represents the external reference and the yellow line represents reference genlock A hashed box represents a timing window or in other words the range of lines within which the timing is adjusted The external reference represented at the top of the dialog box shows a range from 16 to 16 lines You can scroll past this range by dragging the
180. ermines horizontal lines are line to line luminance Fine vertical lines can be more difficult 2Comb Filter Decode mode tries to separate high frequency luminance from the chrominance using the same notch filter as the notch decoder but also takes information from the next line It uses this information to determine if high frequency is luminance or chrominance A comb decoder readily determines finely spaced vertical lines are luminance A lack of line to line phase alteration causes difficulty with fine horizontal lines 56 Profile Family Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control Spatial Adaptive Decoding uses either the comb or notch decoder on a pixel by pixel basis depending on which gives the best results For horizontal lines notch is used for vertical lines comb is used NOTE Spatial adaptive and temporal spatial adaptive decoding uses the high or low threshold setting Temporal Spatial Adaptive This is for earlier analog composite cards only Decoding uses both the next line and the same line in the alternate field in the calculations This decoder uses all of the properties of the Spatial Adaptive decoder plus it uses Temporal interfield changes information The phase change or lack of from field to field helps determine whether high frequency should be decoded as chrominance or Iuminance The threshold determines the amount of motion allowed between alternate fields to still have the Temporal decoder re
181. etics BVW Reference signals NTSC and PAL NTSC and PAL Line formats 525 60 and 625 50 525 60 and 625 50 Video compression Continuously variable motion JPEG Continuously variable motion JPEG MPEG 4 2 0 or 4 2 2 Profile Family 23 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family A Profile System Overview The PDRseries of video servers are multichannel digital disk recorders Both the PDR 100 and PDR200 are capable of supporting up to four play record channels codecs of continuously variable motion JPEG video compression The PDR200 and PDR 300 support Fibre Channel networking and MPEG 4 2 0 4 2 2 video compression with up to two record channels encoders and up to eight playback channels decoders Each channel can play back one video and up to 16 audio signals each capable of using different video formats In other words one Profile unit can replace the functionality of up to eight VTRs with the added benefit of random access to video and audio data stored on disk The Profile system has an EISA motherboard with an internal digital video routing system There are sixteen EISA slots and one ISA slot used for interface cards and routing audio data The server also uses a PCI bus for routing data between the master and slave enhanced disk recorder EDR boards Fibre Channel boards and MPEG boards A video router chip set is integrated on the mother board It routes video signals betwe
182. etwork Host dialog box and add the new host name to the Network Host List 4 Click OK in the Remote Connection dialog box to close it and to open the connection status dialog box which shows the progress of any new connections 344 Profile Family Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit Removing Names from the Network Host List To remove a machine from the Network Host List 1 In the Network Host List click the name you wish to remove 2 Click the Remove button Avoiding a Connection Change When you save a project file it includes the name of the machine to which TimeDelay is connected When you launch the project file at a later time TimeDelay attempts to connect to the same machine By importing a project file rather than opening it you can use the resource configuration from the project without its connection information To import a project file and avoid changing the connection 1 Choose File Import to open the Import Project dialog box a standard WindowsNT Open dialog box 2 Select a project file 3 Click the Open button Unlike the Open operation importing a project file does not change the current machine connection Profile Family 345 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Configuring Channels with Resource Manager The Resource Manager is used for creating and configuring all TimeDelay channels In TimeDelay the first channel labeled Recorder in Figure 172 is always the record channel and all
183. eviously saved by TimeDelay with a tdx Set Drive file extension Save Buffer As Exit Profile Family 361 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Save Saves the TimeDelay project file All TimeDelay project files receive a tdx file extension If the project file has not been saved before Save works like Save As Save As Saves the currently open TimeDelay project file with a new file name Set Drive Selects a different disk volume for the record buffer Save Buffer As Save the record buffer as a PDR movie Exit Closes TimeDelay View Single Column Two Columns Single Column Displays all the playback panels below the record panel in a single column When the column becomes too large for the screen scroll bars appear to allow access to hidden panels Two Columns Displays the record and play panels in two columns as shown in Figure 178 Untitled Project TimeDelay PIG x File View Config Help Recorder E Player 1 Buffer Size 01 34 2300 EB All Stop Playout Delay 00 00 05 00 00 00 00 00 r mi DIM r3A1 A2 A V1 AI r2 E Figure 178 Two column display 362 Profile Family Menus Config Help Resource Manager Opens the Resource Manager dialog box for allocation of video audio and timecode resources and for adding naming and removing channels iesource Manager Timecode Source puto Start Crash Recovery Timecode Source Opens the timecode di
184. f it is not click to toggle it The Search Lines are automatically established for NTSC 525 and PAL 625 Check VITC Present If itis still not on check the genlock signal to make sure that VITC exists and is within the expected range For each video input that should have VITC select it from the list For automatic VITC detection on analog composite and serial digital component signals Verify Automatic VITC detect is selected If it is not click to toggle it Set VITC Reader Linel to the beginning of the search line The minimum line number is 6 in PAL and 10 in NTSC Check for VITC Present For manual VITC detection on analog composite and serial digital component signals Verify Automatic VITC detect is not selected If it is click to toggle it Set VITC Reader Linel and VITC Reader Line2 to the lines where VITC is located If you only have one VITC line enter the same value on both Reader lines Check VITC Present If it is still not on double check your line numbers and try again Profile Family Setting Master Timecode 4 For each video output that should have VITC select it from the list e For analog composite on preexisting PDR 100 and PDR200 units Verify VITC Generator Enable is checked If not click to toggle it Click on Vert Interval to open the Vertical Interval Line Programming dialog box Select the desired VITC lines by checking in the VITC Enable column for the line Th
185. fa clip is locked you cannot delete it When a clip is deleted its source material is not deleted if any other clips or masters reference that material Only after the last clip is deleted is any disk storage freed Profile Family 263 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Emptying the Recycle Bin When a clip or master is deleted it is moved to the Recycle bin and is permanently deleted when the Recycle bin is emptied If an item of the same name is in the Recycle bin the new item is automatically renamed To empty the Recycle bin Choose File Empty Recycle Bin NOTE If the Recycle bin contains no deleted media the Empty Recycle Bin menu item is dimmed The Capture Timeline o Gaphire The capture timeline allows you to capture and trim clips You can set the current time position and adjust mark in or mark out points Edit Click on the Capture button below the audio controls to activate the Capture timeline without changing the current time position Current Capture Duration EtoE Loop Buffered Position Timeline Timecode Button Recording Button Timecode Spin Button Spin Button Current Modify ie Mark Out i Mark In Markin Clip P ark Out Modify Mark Out Timecode DAHAN Adjuster ae Adjuster Mark Out Timecode Button Figure 122 Capture timeline When recording a clip on the capture timeline you see the clip name and its record status With normal recording you see a Record
186. field dominance 1 Choose Options Field Dominance The Field Dominance dialog box appears Figure 100 Panel A Field Dominance Ed C Field 1 Field 2 Cancel Figure 100 Field Dominance dialog box 2 Click Field 1 or Field 2 3 Click OK The change takes effect immediately NOTE Field dominance applies to JPEG clips only and the latest field dominance setting applies to all open panels 202 Profile Family Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility The Profile Disk Utility allows you to create new file systems on a Profile disk set volume format disks set a new disk label load the latest microcode from the disk manufacturer or browse through the SCSI log A Profile volume may consist of the internal disks in a PDR 100 PDR200 or PDR300 or it may be the external disks in a PDX 103 208 Disk Expansion Unit or a PRS200 250 RAID Storage System NOTE You must login as administrator to use this utility After starting the application the Profile Disk Utility window appears Most of the disk utility functions can be performed from this dialog box as shown in Figure 101 5 Profile Disk Utility N8051268 SEAGATE ST19171W N8053268 SEAGATE ST19171W LA217180 SEAGATE ST19171W N8051466 SEAGATE ST19171w N8050373 SEAGATE ST19171W N8052077 SEAGATE ST19171W LA211607 SEAGATE ST19171W N8054015 SEAGATE ST19171w ara fullest Figure 101 Profile Disk Utility window Profile Family 203 T
187. file or just part of it When you delete a clip the media file that the clip refers to remains on disk if at least one other clip refers to it only the reference to the media file is deleted not the media itself You can mark in and out points in a clip These marks change the effective beginning and end points of a clip while not removing the associated material from the media file On the other hand you can trim media to remove material from either end of a clip which also removes the information from the media file Trimmed material is permanently removed from disk and is no longer available for use The default tool for creating and playing clips on the Profile system is VdrPanel VdrPanel provides you with a VTR like interface complete with transport controls to directly manage media operations Once created with VdrPanel clips are available for use with optional Profile applications such as Tool Box Editor or the List Manager VdrPanel allows you to configure any or all of your channels for operation through a controller connected to an RS 422 serial port These controllers either comply with Profile Protocol such as the optional PRC 100 Profile Remote Control unit or with Louth Odetics BVW or BVW insert edit protocols Profile Family 159 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Before using VdrPanel to capture clips you must complete a few steps 1 You must decide whether you want to use the Windows NT interface cal
188. g all the events which would normally be performed after the Take event It will not return to the event that was interrupted unless you highlight that event and use the Take button again NOTE An Approx event type is not a scheduled event You must take an event of type Approx to run it Stopping an Event List Manager provides a way to stop a event at any time You can use the Stop button to interrupt the event on the current channel To stop an event 1 Locate the event which is currently being executed highlighted in green and select the event 2 Click the Stop button to stop the event 3 After a few seconds the event will stop and the video output will display black Profile Family 307 Chapter9 Using the List Manager Customizing Your List Display You may find that the default list display does not meet your needs For example you may have long input names that are not visible because the Name column is not wide enough If you never use List Manager to schedule Record events you might not want to see the Source column at all You can change fonts text color and highlight color in a list display To change a font 1 Choose View Font and the Font dialog box appears Figure 144 Roman Script Small Fonts T Symbol System Figure 144 Font dialog box 2 Enter your changes You can change the font font style font size and color You can also underline and strike out the text 3
189. ganize clips into lists also called groups You can load a saved group of clips You can also save an existing group of clips under a different name You can also create and later edit a list of clips Saving a Group of Clips in a Clip List A clip list can be saved and loaded later To save a clip list as a group 1 Click within the specific Panel dialog box to select the panel where the clip list is currently displayed 2 Choose File Save Group of Clips and the current list of clips as shown in the Clips box is saved in the current group grp If the clips have not been saved in a group previously the Save Group of Clips dialog box appears Save in E profile Seismic arp Fienme Save as type Groups of Clips Cancel Figure 97 Save Group of Clips dialog box 3 If you have not already saved the group choose File Save Group of Clips As The Save As command enables you assign a different name to an already named group of clips preserving the contents of the original group The saved group can be loaded at any time with VideoClip Load Group 198 Profile Family Playing a Clip List Playing a Clip List To play a list of clips 1 Click within the specific Panel dialog box to select the panel 2 Choose VideoClip Load Group if the clip list you want to play is not currently loaded Look in E profile fa c Vi EE File name Seismic arp Files of type Groups of Clips
190. guration File Itis possible to preserve a configuration for later use You can save your current overall configuration in a file and then load it later Configuration files have a cfg extension To save your current configuration in a file 1 Choose File Save Current Configuration The Save As dialog box appears Figure 4 Save in a profile El e d File name new cfg Save as type Contig Files cfg Cancel Figure 4 Save As dialog box for saving a configuration file 2 Enter a file name in the File Name box new cfg in this example 3 Press Enter or click Save The current configuration is saved Profile Family 39 Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Loading a Configuration File To load a configuration file that has been saved previously 1 Choose File Load Configuration File The Open dialog box appears Figure 5 pen i2 x File name fnew cfg Files of type Contig Files cfg Cancel Figure 5 Open dialog box for loading a configuration file 2 A message box warns you that if you load a configuration file all open windows are closed Click Yes to continue 3 Double click a file name in the tree or type the name of the file in the File Name box new cfg in this example 4 Press Enter or click Open The file is loaded as the current configuration 40 Profile Family Setting Master Timecode Setting Master Timecode From the Master VITC
191. gure 127 Loop Reverse Rewind Fast Forward Stop Play Play Figure 127 Transport controls Profile Family 267 T Chapter 8 268 Using the Tool Box Editor The transport controls are Loop Play Plays the active timeline at normal speed When the end of the media is reached play begins again at the beginning of the media Reverse Plays the active timeline in reverse Rewind Rewinds the active timeline or returns the current position to the beginning of the clip Play Plays the active timeline at normal speed Fast Forward Fast forwards the active timeline Stop Stops play on the active timeline Loop Recording You can also loop record material To loop record material you set up a record buffer that will allow you to record for a length of time When you reach the end of the record buffer the current position moves back to the beginning of the buffer and previously recorded material is overwritten The steps for loop recording are as follows 1 Choose Config Record Buffer and the Record Buffer dialog box appears The maximum record time reflects time allocated to all activated buffers and time allocated to the channel and available record time on the Profile unit Record Buffer x Record Buffer Length 5 min 9 sec Cancel Max Record Time 103 min 7 sec Figure 128 Record Buffer dialog box 2 Enter the length of the record buffer and click OK 3 Cl
192. hannel Resource Manager VARLAB1 L Lr Rh Recorder Figure 172 The Resource Manager dialog box Profile Family 347 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay 348 Changing a Panel s Name To change a panel s name 1 Select Config Resource Manager from the TimeDelay menu 2 Select the tab name that needs to be changed 3 In the Name edit box type a the new name Names may be up to 32 characters long and may consist of any alphanumeric characters Channel names should be but are not required to be unique 4 Click the OK button When you close the Resource Manager dialog box the panel corresponding to the renamed channel displays the new name in the TimeDelay window This name is saved with other resource information in the TimeDelay project file Modifying a Channel s Configuration While the details of resource configuration are generally covered in Using the Resource Manager on page 313 TimeDelay imposes some unique restrictions when using Resource Manager to configure channels These unique restrictions are described here Since playback channels share source material with the record channel they must have similar configurations They should have the same number of video audio and timecode tracks and must have the same video compression format You cannot mix MPEG and JPEG resources in the same TimeDelay project Record and playback channels should always have at least one timecode track
193. hannels ports To add a channel click the Add Channel button To remove a channel click the Remove Channel button One channel is always visible A resource such as a video input is available when the checkbox next to its name is empty and its name is in dark print If the resource is in use its name is dimmed If it is in conflict that is in use by another application or channel its name appears in red If it is requested the checkbox next to its name is marked Profile Family 315 T Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Configuring Video Resources To configure video resources 1 Choose a video track in the configuration tree such as Track 1 MPEG 2 Choose an appropriate channel type Player Recorder Player or Recorder see Figure 149 Depending on the channel type different codec or encoder decoder information is displayed below the configuration tree as listed in Table 17 Table 17 Channel types Channel Type MPEG JPEG Player Recorder Encoder and decoder Codec resource resources Player Decoder resource only Codec resource Recorder Encoder resource only Codec resource Type Player Recorder lis Player Recorder Recorder Figure 149 Choosing a channel type EG 316 Profile Family Configuring Video Resources To add a video track click the Add Track button and the Add Track dialog box appears see Figure 150 Click Video then select either JPEG or MPEG
194. he settings in that column Choose View Columns to change which columns are displayed See Customizing Your List Display on page 308 Status This cell displays the current status of the event The word Status does not appear in the header The Status column is active only in the On air List in the Monitor view If there is a conflict between an event and any other event in the current list or another event on the On air List the Status cell displays Error You can identify the conflict by right clicking on the cell and reading the error message in the Event Property dialog box Table 16 shows all the event status indicators Table 16 Event status indicators Status Color Description Play Green The event is currently being executed Record Green The audio and video from the specified input is currently being recorded as the Destination clip name Error Red The signal is in conflict with another event or the material is not available Stop White The event is stopped Cued Yellow Approximately five seconds before Start Time the required resources are prepared for playback or recording Take White Event is about to be executed Name This cell identifies the clip or master name whether it is being played or whether it is a new clip being recorded Start Time You can enter the time at which you wish to play the specified material Enter the time in standard timecode format HH MM SS
195. he Toolbar and Status Bar 109 Viewing Help and Software Version Information 109 Connecting to a Remote Machine 2 000 110 Contents Viewing the Media Hierarchy l l eere 112 Toolbars ze ped CI LE Tae e E ae 115 Copying Media eere 116 Using Paste Special llle 117 Moving Media 1n RR E ERRARE 118 Duplicating Media sss 120 Creating Renaming and Deleting Bins 120 Renaming Clips and Masters elles 121 Deleting Clips and Masters l l eene 122 Emptying the Recycle Bin esee 122 Viewing Properties 0 cee eee eee eee eee 124 Finding Clips and Masters 0 0 0 eee eee eee ee 128 Using the Transcode Utility llle 130 Using a Library System eee ee 137 Archiving a Bin or Clip 1 2 0 ee 137 Restoring a Bin or Clip 66 ee 138 Renaming an Archived Clip e eee ee 139 Deleting an Archived Clip cece eee 140 Importing a Cartridge naaa eee 140 Exporting a Cartridge lee 142 Updating and Inventorying Cartridges 144 Inventorying the Library eee ee 146 Formatting Cartridges 0 eee eee eee 147 Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties 150 Viewing Tape Transport Status 153 Viewing the Transfer Monitor 0 0 e eee ee eee 156 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Selecting a Co
196. he clip 7 Drag the Clip Position Bar to the beginning of the clip 8 Click Play The clip starts at the in mark and stops at the out mark Removing Marks To remove in and out marks from a clip 1 Select a clip containing marks in the Clip Name box E 2 Click the Remove In Mark button to remove a mark in point and reset the clip beginning to the actual start of the clip X 3 Click the Remove Out Mark button to remove the mark out point and reset the clip ending to the actual end of the clip Trimming Clips You can trim a clip from the beginning of the clip to the in mark or from the out mark to the end of the clip This action affects all copies of the clip on all panels The trimmed material is not retrievable A warning message and verification prompt are displayed before the function completes Profile Family 201 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel To trim a clip 1 Select a clip with either in or out marks or both in the Clip Name box H 2 Click the Trim to Mark button to remove the portion of the current clip preceding the in mark 3 Click the Trim from Out Mark button to remove the portion of the current clip following the out mark Setting Field Dominance for Marks You can set field dominance so that a clip s mark in and mark out points occur at field 1 or field 2 of a given frame By default the field dominance is set so that either field 1 or field 2 can be a mark in or mark out point To change
197. he most recent cards the vertical interval settings are handled under the Advanced Control tab There are different vertical interval line numbers in the dialog boxes depending on your video standard NTSC 525 or PAL 625 To change vertical interval settings 1 Click or double click on the Vertical Interval tab see Figure 17 Analog Composite Video Input J5 Composite InA J5 M ee me rte oa eee Er K EE E RUE ERIT ER AU Figure 17 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Vertical Interval tab 60 Profile Family Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval 2 Move the sliders for each individual line to select Normal Notch Pass on Y or Delete Normal indicates the vertical interval video line is passed through Notch applies notch filtering to the vertical interval video line chrominance information and any luminance around the chroma subcarrier are removed Pass On Y passes luminance information straight through This is useful for VITC and closed caption or data filtering Delete removes the vertical interval video line and replaces it with black 3 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 4 Click Default to return all values to their default values 5 Click Close to accept all inputs Profile Family 61 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Component Video Input You can configure analog component video CAV input with the Analog
198. he particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited 3 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name Audio for example Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces The window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 4 Associated Video Input Channel lists the name of the digital component video input channel associated with the audio signal Profile Family 79 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Related Audio Channels lists the audio channels that are related to the signal name Select an audio group You can either click Automatic Group Select or click the button associated with the group 1 4 in the Selected Audio Receive Group Selected Group Status represents parity error and check sum error with a status indicator for each The green light indicates an error condition These indicators cannot be edited Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box as they were set at the time the dialog box appeared Click Close to accept the changes 80 Profile Family Analog Audio Output Analog Audio Output To change the analog audio output signal name 1 Select Audio Output from the configuration tree and then click or double click an analog audio name from the list Analog Audi
199. he program is first started the Current Logs selection will not be available Untitled Profile Log Capture Tool Figure 107 Log set selection screen 214 Log Capture Tool After choosing a log set click the Next button to advance to the size selection screen Figure 108 Choose one of these three sizes e 1 4 MB file size Select this file size if you are using floppy diskettes to send the information to Grass Valley Group e Single file Custom file size enter a number in the field to specify the number of 100 000 byte blocks minimum 2 The single file and custom file size selections allow you to choose the file size that is most convenient for you to ftp or e mail to Grass Valley Group Untitled Profile Log Capture Tool Figure 108 Size selection screen Clicking the Back button returns to the log set selection screen if you want to change your log set selection Profile Family 215 Chapter 6 216 Using Profile Utilities The Next button completes the log capture and file sizing process and advances you to the Log Tool Complete screen The Log Tool Complete screen displays the location of the ZIP files that were created from the log set that you selected Carefully note the location of the files created then click OK to exit the program NOTE Clicking OK does not send any files to Grass Valley Group it merely ends the program To send the files you must copy them to floppy d
200. he volumes to be included in the data set from the Available Volumes list and click Add To remove volumes from the data set select volumes from the Selected Volumes list and click Remove 3 Choose File Make Data Set or click Make Data Set 204 Profile Family Setting a Disk Label Setting a Disk Label To set a disk label 1 Choose File Set Label or click Set Label The Set Label dialog box appears Set Label x Current Label INT New Label Figure 102 Set Label dialog box 2 Enter the new label name in the New Label box The label name can have up to seven characters and can contain only alphanumeric characters 0 9 a z or A Z dashes or underlines _ 3 Click Set when complete Profile Family 205 T Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility Formatting a Disk Volume Formatting disks organizes them so the Profile system can write data to and read data from them in an orderly way All media disks come preformatted from the factory Sss CAUTION Formatting disks removes all media and other data from the disks Format disks only when absolutely necessary To format a disk 1 Select the desired physical volume with the tab in the lower pane 2 Select the desired disks 3 Choose Disk Utilities Format Disk s or click Format The Format Disk s dialog box appears If disks are non Seagate you can select a block size The estimated time remaining to format the disk or disks is displayed
201. however applications attempting to load the same code are given access to proceed The c profile profile log file tracks all messages from the video processor The state of the video processor is periodically checked If the processor does not respond an administrator alert is generated The event is logged to the Windows NT Event log The Event log can be viewed with the Event Viewer application PDR Access Control is automatically installed and started as part of the installation process and is restarted every time the system is rebooted This procedure is provided in the unlikely event that you need to start the service manually 1 Log in as administrator 2 Double click My Computer on the desktop 3 Double click the Control Panel icon 4 Double click the Services icon The Services dialog box appears Figure 114 Profile Family 235 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities x Services Service Status Startup Network DDE DSDM Manual Norton SpeedDisk Started Automatic Bent Norton Unerase Protection Started Automatic NT LM Security Support Provider Manual t PDA ccess Control Started Automatic Plug and Play Started Automatic Pause Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator Started Manual num Remote Procedure Call RPC Service Started Automatic Schedule Manual Startup Server Started Automatic HW Profiles Startup Parameters EHE Figure 114 Services dialog box 5 Select P
202. ick BUF in the upper right corner of the screen to activate this feature When activated the button is lit 4 Follow the steps in Capturing a New Clip on 266 Profile Family Playing a Clip Playing a Clip Now that you have recorded a clip you can play it back 1 2 3 Select a clip in the current bin Choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click on the Load button on the current bin toolbar The clip is loaded onto the capture timeline Click on the Play button You can also drag and drop a clip onto the capture timeline To drag and drop a clip l 2 Select a clip by clicking the left mouse button while the mouse pointer is over the desired clip and hold the button down Drag the clip to the capture timeline and release the mouse button Trimming a Clip Trimming a clip means changing the mark in and or mark out points so that the clip duration becomes shorter To trim a clip 1 2 3 Select the clip you want to trim in the current bin Load the clip onto the capture timeline Do one of the following Drag the mark in or mark out cursors to a new position on the timeline see the mark in and mark out cursors in Figure 122 page 264 Drag the current time cursor to a new location and click on the Modify Mark in button or Modify Mark out button The current position is taken as the new mark position Adjust the in and out marks by e
203. ick OK when you are done viewing the library properties 150 Profile Family Viewing Library Cartridge and Archived Clip Properties To view the properties for a cartridge 1 Select a cartridge icon in the tree pane 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The cartridge properties dialog box appears Because the size in megabytes is constant the available time is an approximation based on the settings in the Anticipated Video and Audio Quality boxes The higher the quality the less time is available for storage 3 Click OK when you are done viewing the cartridge properties 00001600 Figure 71 Properties dialog box for a cartridge Profile Family 151 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager To view the properties for a archived clip on a cartridge 1 Select a clip icon in the contents pane ei 2 Choose Properties from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Properties button on the toolbar The clip properties dialog box appears Figure 72 Properties dialog box for an archived clip 3 Click Read only if you want to prevent modifying renaming or deleting the clip 4 Click OK when you are done viewing the clip properties 152 Profile Family Viewing Tape Transport Status Viewing Tape Transport Status To view the status of the tape transports in the li
204. ideo Typically the transmission or storage of video as a separate luminance and chrominance information such as Y B Y R Y Compression video A technique for reducing the amount of space needed to store images or sequences of images JPEG Motion JPEG M JPEG and MPEG are examples of video compression techniques Data cartridge A digital tape cartridge that is capable of storing media in large quantities dB Decibel In theory the minimum change in sound intensity that the human ear can distinguish also a relative unit used to compare the strength of acoustic signals 368 Profile Family Glossary Default A value that is automatically assigned or used in the absence of any other input For example a new Profile system shipped from the factory is zero timed by default while E to E mode is the nondefault setting Dialog box A box displayed in a computer application s graphical user interface where you choose options and enter information Use the mouse or keyboard to move from field to field click on buttons and position the text insertion point Enter information with the keyboard Digital In digital audio video systems sounds and images are converted into a series of binary values ones and zeros Dto A Digital to analog converter device used to convert digital signals into an analog form For example compact disc players use D to convertors to convert the digital information on the CD into analog a
205. idge icon or icons in the tree pane 2 Choose Format from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click The Format dialog box appears see Figure 68 The Name field shows the name or names of the cartridges to be formatted If more than one cartridge is selected the number of cartridges is shown see Figure 69 Format 00000016 o 9 Broadcast 48 Mbit s Figure 68 Format Cartridge dialog box Profile Family 147 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Format Multiple Cartridges x E 4 cartridges selected C Single Partition r Multiple Partitions Partition Duration 2 minutes Y Anticipated Video Quality Broadcast 48 Mbit s Anticipated Audio Quality fi 6 bits v v Multiple files per partition OK Cancel Help Figure 69 Format Cartridge dialog box 3 Click Single Partition or Multiple Partitions With a Single Partition the cartridge or cartridges will have one partition when formatted and all clips are archived to the same partition With Multiple Partitions the cartridge or cartridges will have two or more partitions depending on other settings You do not actually set the duration of clips or video and audio quality you simply approximate based on how you anticipate using the cartridges You cannot set the number of partitions directly If you choose Multiple Partitions To set the anticipated length time duration of clips under the
206. igital Interface chassis You can expand the number of XLR or BNC connectors for AES EBU audio with an optional XLR216 or BNC216 Digital Interface chassis You can choose an audio format for each video channel For example you could enable analog audio on one channel embedded audio on another and AES EBU on the rest NOTE Do not turn off sample rate conversion or use AES EBU asa reference unless you are certain that all inputs and outputs are synchronous Profile Family 83 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Audio Input In analog audio input you can change audio channel names check the channel overload status or adjust line levels in decibels Click Undo to cancel changes or click Help for context sensitive Help To configure analog audio input 1 Expand Audio Input and then click one of the Analog Channels The Analog Audio Input dialog box appears Figure 31 The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical input connectors on the audio input box Ch 01 refers to the first connector and Ch 02 refers to the second connector and so forth Analog Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 1 4 x i Line Level Name Choi JAnsogimi r2 Ch 02 analogne Ch 03 analogni DD O04 fanaloginavi2 Close Orde Help Figure 31 Analog Audio Input dialog box Main tab 2 Click the Main tab if it is not already visible 3 Click in the box of the input channel
207. ile a 39 Open dialog box for loading a configuration file lille 40 Master Timecode dialog box genlock settings AA a 41 System Timing dialog box zero timed lille 45 System Timing dialog box E to timed 0 0 00 eee eee 46 Reference Genlock dialog box lille 48 LTC Inputs amp Outputs dialog box n anana sess 50 MPEG Input Timing dialog box III 51 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab A 52 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab B 53 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab A 55 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Advanced Control tab B 56 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Time Base Correction tab 59 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Vertical Interval tab 60 Component Analog Video Input dialog box CAV 0 cee eee ee 62 Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box 0 eee eee 64 Serial Digital Component Video Input Advanced 0200200 eee eee 66 Analog Composite Video Output dialog box 000 0c eee eee 67 Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval tab 2 70 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Maintab 71 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Burn in Timecode tab 73 Seri
208. ile Family EDL 370 EISA 24 EISA bus 77 Ejecting clips 192 197 Emptying the Recycle Bin 264 Emptying the Recycle Bin in Media Manager 122 Enable Impulse Noise Reduction 58 Enable Luma 58 Enable Procamp 68 Enable Quiet Line 58 Encoders 24 Encoders MPEG 23 Entry window timecode 265 Ethernet 23 36 234 241 Event Archive 299 date 291 duration 291 inserting 300 play 287 record 295 removing 301 settings 289 start time 290 switch 297 taking 307 transfer 298 Event log Windows NT 235 Event Number column 291 Event order 300 Event Scheduler Engine definition 281 stopping 281 Event Viewer application 235 Expanding the media tree 112 Explore in Media Manager 112 Exporting a cartridge 142 F Factory default 370 Fast Forward 182 268 fcconfig 244 fcncs 252 fcping 249 Fibre Channel 36 105 241 Fibre Channel IP Address 244 Fibre Channel switch 246 Field 370 Field dominance 202 Field Selection 182 File Open 303 Save 302 File systems 204 Finding Clips and Masters 128 Finding media in Media Manager 128 Firmware 237 370 Fixed Q 169 Follow 300 Formatting cartridges 147 Forward One Field 185 fps 370 Frame 371 Free Run timecode 178 Freeze timecode 178 Frequency response 371 Index G Gain levels 277 Gaussian Chroma Filter 68 Generator timecode 178 Genlock 27 371 Go to Clip Beginning 185 Go to Clip End 185 GOP 21 170 371 Graphical user interface 371 Group 371 Group Fader 85 100 G
209. illary data information into the video stream 4 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 5 Click Close to accept the changes 76 Profile Family PDR 100 Audio PDR100 Audio The PDR 100 supports both analog and serial digital embedded 625 only audio inputs and outputs depending on which boards are installed your the PDR 100 system Audio in the PDR 100 is routed using the EISA bus with data flow controlled by a real time controller and the audio interface card The analog audio card is capable of converting four channels of analog audio to digital audio and vice versa using 16 bit 48kHz conversion The input and output data flow to the card via the EISA bus with sample clocks coming from a video interface card such as the analog composite board or the SDI board However the analog audio card can only have one clock operating at a time If the card is used as an input device it must have the clock that originates on the video board associated with the audio Profile Family 77 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Audio Input To open the Analog Audio Input dialog box 1 Select Audio Input from the configuration tree and then click or double click an analog audio name from the list such as Analog InA J6 The dialog box appears as shown in Figure 27 Analog Audio Input J8 A Analog InA J8 Name Analog inA J8 Related Audio Channels Select Audio R
210. in the Start Time field This time should be at least 10 seconds ahead of the current time Click the Close button When you activate auto start a countdown is shown on the record panel When the countdown gets to 00 00 00 00 recording begins Auto Start Ea Enable Auto Start to automatically begin recording when the current timecode source reaches the appropriate start time eTevovevovsveccsnvoeed Current Time 00 15 44 19 Start Time 00 15 40 26 Figure 174 The Auto Start dialog box Profile Family 351 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Working with the Record Buffer 352 The record buffer is a quantity of storage space allocated for recording The size of the buffer determines how much video can be stored before recording returns to the beginning of the buffer and limits the length of delay that you can set You can select a different drive to be the record buffer s location and you can save the contents of the buffer as a clip Setting the Record Buffer Size To set the record buffer size enter the buffer duration in the Record Panel s Buffer Size edit box The record buffer must be at least 5 seconds longer than your longest playout delay The minimum buffer size is 10 seconds the maximum buffer size is the recording capacity of the current record buffer volume By default the maximum buffer size is shown when TimeDelay is started If you enter a buffer size that is greater than the amount of a
211. in the contents pane select the clip icon that you want to archive Hold the left mouse button and drag the selected icon to the partition icon in the tree pane where you want to archive the bin or clip If you want to check on the progress of an archive operation click on the Profile logo or choose Tools Transfer Monitor to view the Transfer Monitor Restoring a Bin or Clip To restore an archived clip means to copy it from a partition in a cartridge in the library system to disk Clips are always copied out of the library when restored they are never moved To restore an archived clip using the copy method 1 In the tree pane click the cartridge icon from which you want to restore a clip This expands the tree pane to reveal the partition icon or icons Click the partition in the tree pane from which you want to restore to reveal the clips in the contents pane In the contents pane select the archived clip you want to restore To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane Choose Copy on the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with the right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar Select the location where you want to restore the archived clip This can be a bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may also be in another Media Manager window
212. ing label With loop recording you see a Buffer Recording label If a clip is being recorded on another channel simultaneously the Mark in and Mark out buttons are disabled and the Read Only label is displayed 264 Profile Family The Capture Timeline The Tool Box Editor displays four timecode indicators current position duration mark in and mark out The timecode indicators display hours minutes seconds and frames in the form 00 00 00 00 The duration displays the minimum number of digits Drop frame timecode is indicated by a semicolon before the frame number Each part of the timecode frames seconds etc can be selected by a click of the left mouse button and then changed separately To the right of each indicator are the spin buttons with an arrow pointing up or down Click on the up arrow and the time is increased or decrease it by clicking the down arrow When a clip is loaded onto the capture timeline the current position timecode indicator shows the frame accurate cursor position in the clip To move the current position cursor click anywhere on the capture timeline The updated timecode is displayed in the indicator as you move the cursor To adjust a clip s mark in or out point move the current position cursor to the desired location and then click on the Modify Mark In or Modify Mark Out button The mark in and mark out timecode indicators are displayed on either side of the capture timeline The mark in and
213. ion Manager eee eee eee 33 Media Manager 0 cee eee tees 33 Transcode Utility cer ith RE RR Ret ma 33 VdrBane i ES NAAN n E HE SEES 34 Profile Disk Utility 1i vue AR Bian LAUR 34 Tool Box Editor ee ttr en 35 List Manager uci RERO RR PRA a P Ete dua 35 AimebDelay aks nct RAE RR Ce S ea Reo bat edt epo 35 Profile Utilities 4 eu na Ge eee Paar PI ee PR 36 Fibre Channel Support ee 36 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Saving a Configuration File llli 39 Loading a Configuration File cece eee 40 Setting Master Timecode ees 41 Setting the System Timing 00 0c eee eee 44 Eto E Timed Outputs 0 0 eee 46 Adjusting the Timing when Upgrading to 2 5 47 AUtO TIMING 33 5 5 die pitas BAGON ORE Ry nl EROR RR b and ee 47 Setting the Reference Genlock eee eee eee 48 Changing LTC Input and Output Names 2 2 0 50 Setting MPEG Input Timing sels 51 Profile Family T Contents Chapter 3 4 Profile Family Mideo MPU ec pina Peat aks XU PD HR Ra RE Rome OUR Rd 52 Analog Composite Video Input ee 52 Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control 55 Analog Composite Video Input Time Base Correction 59 Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval 60 Analog Component Video Input 22a 62 Serial Digital Component Video Input
214. is displayed 2 Enter the name of new bin in the text box or accept the default name 3 Click OK to accept the new bin name The new bin automatically appears in the current bin display Record Time Remaining Below the edit timeline lower left is the record time remaining in the form 00 00 Hours Minutes This indicates the amount of storage remaining in the current Profile volume The amount varies based on the current video quality Generally the higher the quality of video the more disk space is used thus leaving less time remaining Renaming Media To rename a clip or master 1 Select the clip or master in the current bin 2 Choose Rename from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also select the bin or master again in the current bin 3 Type a new name then press Enter Profile Family 261 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Viewing Media Properties You can view the media properties for clips and masters To view these properties 1 Select a clip or master in the current bin 2 Choose Properties from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also double click the clip or master in the current bin The Properties dialog box appears see Figure 121 Figure 121 Properties dialog box 262 Profile Family Deleting Media In this dialog box you can view A preview frame of the clip or master to help identify it Preview frames are not av
215. isk or transmit them using ftp or e mail Untitled Profile Log Capture Tool C 4profile4logs4archive4LOG50707 0001PL07071 zip C profileMogs archiveXLO GS 0707 000 PLO07072 zip C profileMogs archiveNLOGS 0707 000 PLO07073 zip C profileMogsNarchivesLOG 0707 000 NPLO07074 zip C profileMogsNarchivesLOGS0707 000 PLO07075 zip C profileMogs SarchiveNLO GS 0707 000 PLO7075 zip Figure 109 Log tool complete screen Profile Protocol Resources Profile Protocol Resources The Profile Protocol Resources utility lets you assign Profile resources such as inputs outputs and codecs for use with ports controlled by Profile Protocol over an RS 422 connection and managed by ProLink The PRC 100 is one example of a device which uses these ports Profile Protocol implements Named Configuration Space NCS as a mechanism to ease Profile configuration Using NCS an application can send one command Open Port 10 01 with a parameter specifying a configuration file to use and the Profile unit handles all the resource allocation and crosspoints specified in the configuration file This frees the application from the task of allocating resources manually The Profile Protocol Resources utility provides a simple graphical way of creating configuration files It replaces previous Profile Protocol configuration tools such as the PRC 100 Configuration Utility prccfg exe and configures all Profile resources including MPEG encoders
216. justing column width 311 Advanced 55 66 AES EBU 26 83 365 Air time in Monitor view 293 Analog Audio Input PDR100 78 PDR200 84 Analog audio interfaces 23 Analog Audio Output PDR100 81 PDR200 89 Analog Component 62 Analog Composite Video Input Advanced Control 55 Vertical Interval 60 Analog Composite Video Output 67 Analog video 365 API 28 Application programming interface 28 Archive event 299 Archive library 365 Archived clip properties 150 Archiving a bin or clip 137 ASPB 365 Assemble record mode 365 Assigning Profile Channels 315 Audio channels 277 configuration 93 controls 277 gain levels 277 I O 366 input mapping 93 meters 277 monitor in VdrPanel 188 output mapping 96 PDR 100 23 77 PDR200 23 83 Audio Resources configuring 327 setting the audio window size 329 Audio signal processing board ASPB 25 audio window size setting 329 Auto Start 351 366 Auto Timing 47 B B picture 22 170 366 Back One Field 185 Bad blocks 208 Betacam 172 Bin 105 archiving 137 cleaning up 269 Profile Family 381 Index creating a new 120 deleting 121 renaming 121 restoring from archive 138 Bit rate 170 366 Black Level 69 Blocks 208 BNC 216 Digital Interface chassis 26 83 BNC connections 176 366 Boards information on 38 Bounce 183 Building a list 287 Burn in timecode 26 73 BVW 162 BVW insert edit 172 BVW clip length 164 Bytes per Field 169 C Camera 253 Capture 367 Capture timelin
217. l time processor which controls compression and the data flows on SCSI 2 channels and JPEG codecs Master and slave EDR boards also control MPEG encoder and decoder boards which are connected to the master and slave via a PCI interconnect board Video Compression The 1960 on the master board is used to control data flow and compression coefficient loading of the JPEG codecs and if present MPEG encoders and decoders The amount of JPEG video compression varies according to the setting of the compression coefficient the amount of MPEG video compression varies according to the bit rate Higher compression ratios or bit rates store more video but the result is lower quality video On the other hand lower compression ratios or bit rates result in higher quality video and less storage capacity Audio however is not compressed Since the video compression ratio can be varied to change the video quality given available storage time the amount of storage depends on your choice of compression ratio A quick rule of thumb is that five minutes of JPEG video plus four channels of audio and two channels of timecode is roughly equal to one gigabyte of disk storage at 75 000 bytes per field in the 525 standard video format For example a PDX 208 Disk Expansion unit expands storage up to twelve hours and a PRS200 RAID Storage System can bring it up to approximately 96 hours For video stored in the MPEG format at an average 24 Mbps you can just abou
218. lay application Launching a project file directly starts TimeDelay with the saved project settings Saving a TimeDelay Project To save a TimeDelay project 1 Choose File Save or File Save As This opens a standard WindowsNT Save dialog TimeDelay projects use the tdx file name extension 2 Chose a file name and file location for the TimeDelay project This can be anywhere on the WindowsNT network 3 Click the Save button Opening an Existing Project To open an existing TimeDelay project do one of the following Double click a TimeDelay project file in the WindowsNT desktop With TimeDelay running select File Open This opens a standard WindowsNT Open dialog which allows you to select an existing TimeDelay project file Profile Family 341 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Launching a Project at Start up To automatically launch a TimeDelay project at start up 1 Configure and save a TimeDelay project 2 Add the name of the TimeDelay project file to the end of the pdrstart bat file Pdrstart bat is a start up script that is installed with the Profile software By adding the project name to the start up file you ensure that TimeDelay will not attempt to run until all Profile services have been initialized at start up Copying Project Files Between Machines Once you create a TimeDelay project file you can copy it to any number of machines or open it remotely There are several issues to co
219. le click an item in the list of found items the tree pane is expanded and the item is selected in the contents pane You can copy an item from the found list by holding the Control key and dragging the item to the desired location or you can move it by dragging it without the Control key Click Close when you have completed your search Profile Family 129 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Using the Transcode Utility If you have MPEG encoders or decoders in your Profile disk recorder you may have media recorded in motion JPEG compression format that you want to convert to MPEG The Transcode Utility is a tool that makes format conversions easy The Transcode Utility converts media files clips and masters in four ways From JPEG to JPEG using a different video quality From JPEG to MPEG From MPEG to MPEG using a different video quality From MPEG to JPEG NOTE Converting a low quality video clip to a higher quality higher bit rate will not improve the video quality of the clip though it will consume more disk space The Transcode Utility is started from the Tools menu in Media Manager Transcode Utility I cf x File Edit Help PG Convert Preview GA Target Format Target Quality WA m MPEG Medium x HI Ah H T Delete source after conversion Remove Figure 57 Transcode Utility window 130 Profile Family Using the Transcode Utility To convert clips or masters 1
220. led Panel Control to capture and play clips or if you want to use an external device to control your Profile system To select a controller see Selecting a Controller on page 161 You need to configure the playback and record JPEG and MPEG channels audio channels and the VITC timecodes for your selected controller To configure the controller see Configuring a Controller on page 165 You must set video crosspoints or connections This means that you can select video inputs codecs and outputs You can also choose to bypass codecs See Selecting Video Crosspoints on page 175 You can select timecode panel display which timecode generators to use select drop frame timecode and also set timecode crosspoints inputs generators and outputs See Setting Timecode on page 177 For information on how to start and close VdrPanel see Starting and Closing Profile Applications on page 31 The VdrPanel window is shown in Figure 76 By default the VdrPanel window appears automatically at power up unless you log in manually You display all available panels in the VdrPanel window up to eight with MPEG Each panel is dedicated to one video channel 160 Profile Family Selecting a Controller YdrPanel Panel A Panel Control File VideoClip Controller Options Window Help Panel A Panel Control maana Panel B Panel Control Co Bo timecode size te T Te Rec rew stop play ffwd m SS SS dm
221. lick the Stop button The playback channel stops and shows black 2 In the Playout Delay edit box enter the new delay value 3 Click the Play button The playback channel restarts immediately with the new delay Pausing Playback To pause playback click the Pause button in the Playback Panel for the channel that you wish to pause The playback channel s output pauses As the time difference between the record position and the paused playback position increases the playout delay value also increases until it exceeds the maximum playout delay automatically stopping the channel To resume playback after a pause click either the Pause button or the Play button in the paused Playback Panel Profile Family 355 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Working with Timecode When TimeDelay channels are configured one our more timecode tracks can be connected to timecode sources including external VITC and LTC signals or an internal timecode generator As with all TimeDelay channel resources the number of timecode tracks in each playback channel should match the number of timecode tracks in the record channel Since TimeDelay panels have a single timecode display they can only display timecode from a single source at a time The Select Timecode Source dialog box shown in Figure 176 allows you to select from multiple timecode sources Select Timecode Source Ed TimeDelay panels can only display timecode from a See single source at a
222. lly Starting the TimeDelay Process 350 Automatically Starting the TimeDelay Process 351 Working with the Record Buffer a 352 Setting the Record Buffer Size 0 4 aa 352 Changing the Record Buffer s Location 352 Saving the Record Buffer Contents as a Profile Movie 353 Working with the Playback Panel a 354 Setting a Playout Delay 0 ce eee eee 354 Starting a Playback Channel Immediately 354 Modifying a Playout Delay eese 355 Pausing PlayDack eet RO NAAN BAGA NANG 355 Working with Timecode lle 356 Crash Hecovery sss sosta a ND ARR tp ien Tino DANG a RE ae 357 Setting Audio Levels eee eee 358 Using the Interface l l BR 359 The Record Panel 0 e eee eee eee 359 The Playback Panel 0 0 0 e eee eee eee 360 MOIS 1o o eH ee ae ete Rohe NA eee ok Ges ok ee ect 361 S UA nd NAA NAAN NGA casted Garde Dn DAD 361 MICE 362 GONG aa naka ha AB T 363 Glossary Index 10 Profile Family Figures 1 ONOD OA RA ON o 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 The PDR200 300 block diagram et eee 27 PDR Application shortcuts on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop 31 Profile Configuration Manager window 2 02 I 37 Save As dialog box for saving a configuration f
223. lock This term defines the relationship between video paths Two video signals that are exactly synchronized are said to be genlocked GUI A Graphical User Interface GUI provides a visual way to interact with computer software GUIs allow people to control an application by using a pointing device such as a mouse to perform operations The usual alternative to a GUI is a command line interface which requires people to type in application specific commands following precise rules of syntax GUIs are considered easier to use than command line interfaces Group In audio terms this provides the ability to group tracks to perform functions across several tracks at the same time such as gain mute etc GOP A Group of Pictures GOP is part of the video compression scheme used by MPEG MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is it reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame It does so by relying on a GOP A GOP is composed of I frames B pictures and P pictures See B Picture I frame P Picture Profile Family 371 T Glossary Hard disk Computer systems use hard disks as permanent storage devices Information is magnetically recorded on spinning platters for quick access Hardware The physical parts of a system such as a computer display monitor or keyboard Help Profile software applications come with on line help manuals that include examples demonstrations
224. log box appears as shown in Figure 140 Duration 00 00 00 00 Type Absolute 7 StattDate 1117 1998 Comment er Start Time Repeat Hour s Minutes None e Pa pa C Hourly Jo No End Date Time C Daily End Date C Weekly End Time TN Figure 140 New Switch Event dialog box 3 In the New Switch Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 289 This will set the cross point switch for the channel so that your video input is routed directly to the output In a PDR 100 audio inputs are not routed to audio outputs for switch events however they are routed to audio outputs in the PDR200 and PDR300 4 Click OK Profile Family 297 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Scheduling a Transfer Event You can schedule transfer events in your lists A transfer event schedules the copying of media from one Profile video disk recorder to another Profile unit on the network requires Ethernet and Fibre Channel connections Only one Transfer event may be scheduled at one time 1 Open the list to which you wish to add the live event 2 Choose File New Event Transfer and the New Transfer Event dialog box appears as shown in Figure 141 Start Time FERE Duration inorono Type faAbsoute StatDate 117177138 Comment ven YYAz Source Media Destination Media Source Profile Destination Profile r Repeat Hour s Mi
225. ls tab 0 0055 99 System Audio Configuration dialog box sanaaa aeaea 101 Fibre Channel Network Configuration dialog box eee 102 Media Manager window 2 RH 106 Add Remove Machine dialog box ne 110 Add Network Host dialog box n 111 The Media Manager tree pane 2 n 113 The Paste Special dialog box eee 117 Confirm Copy dialog box RII 119 Recycle Bin properties dialog box 0 123 Properties dialog box for volumes ee 124 Properties dialog box for clips or masters cece eee eee 125 The transcode history page eet teens 127 Find dialog DOX 2 kaa e eR en he Pad edd oa NGA BAND RR RR NAN ER 128 Transcode Utility window llle RR III 130 JPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box 132 MPEG Custom Video Quality Settings dialog box 133 Transcode Utility dialog box Convert tab eee 134 The Transcode Description dialog box een 135 Transcode Utility dialog box Preview tab 1 2 2 eee ees 136 Import Cartridge dialog bOX 1 kets 141 Export Cartridge dialog Dox 2 leet III 142 Confirm Update dialog box 2 cette 144 Confirm Inventory dialog box ssseese e I 145 Confirm Inventory dialog box sls I 146 Format Cartridge dialog box e 147 Format Cartridge dialog box lisse 148
226. m r1 EN NEEND HD c i con mam n cips timecode size type e T T v e aei Rec rem so d So play fied Rec rew stop play ffwd mm Las Imm d EZ NEN H limecode size type size type kapalan bai Rec rew xn play ffwd rew stop play ffwd CT TES timecode size type Lo Ef a o pr Rec rew stop play ffwd Td ama KA Irc Figure 76 VdrPanel window Selecting a Controller Before you can use a video channel you must first configure it to use a controller The default controller is Panel Control Panel Control specifies control from the Windows NT user interface and no communication port selection or additional configuration is necessary Other controller choices allow you to select serial control protocols and require an external device and additional setup such as selection of a serial communications port or specifying clip length for BVW type controllers The Profile Family 161 Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Comm Port dialog box appears automatically the first time you select a Louth Odetics or BVW controller see Selecting a Communications Port on page 163 NOTE The Controller Manage Archive menu command is available under special circumstances in Louth Automation Contact your Grass Valley Group representative for more information To select a controller 1 Click a panel to make it active 2 Choose Controller Select to open the Controller Setup dialog box Figure TT 3
227. m with two Serial Digital Component cards and one Analog Composite Input card the Serial Digital inputs will be numbered 00 through 03 and the Composite input will be numbered 04 regardless of where the Composite card is placed Column 6 optional separator or space This is mandatory if column 7 is meaningful optional otherwise Column 7 optional parameters For inputs this must be an S for Shareable In addition certain resources may specify additional parameters starting in column 7 These parameters are read and assigned in the order given below For JPEG codecs goalsize bytes field minimum luminance Q maximum luminance Q minimum chrominance Q and maximum chrominance Q Profile Family 223 T Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities 224 For MPEG encoders bitrate format GopEnd iPerGOP pPerl bPerIP PixStruct FirstEncodedLine and LastEncodedLine If you don t specify parameters the default values are used You can override the defaults in the cfg file or by using the MPEG API calls Acceptable values for these parameters are shown in Table 12 Table 12 MPEG Encoder Parameters Parameter Acceptable Values Default bitrate Mb s between 4000000 and 50000000 18000000 format Select 4 2 2 or 4 2 0 do not use the colons in 422 the file entry GopEnd 0 GopOpenEnd 1 1 GopClosedEnd iPerGOP Reserved Must be 1 1 pPerl The number of P pictures per I picture f
228. mark out markers on the capture timeline indicate where these marks lie on the clip To move the mark in or mark out grab the mark in or mark out marker on the capture timeline by clicking on it with the left mouse button and holding the button down while you move it To bring up the timecode entry window click in a timecode indicator and then press plus sign minus sign on the keypad or equal sign on the keyboard To add to a timecode click inside a timecode indicator press and the timecode entry window appears Enter the desired value in the form 00 00 00 00 and press Enter Only numbers need to be typed The value is added to the timecode Profile Family 265 T Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor To subtract from a timecode click inside a timecode indicator press and the timecode entry window appears Enter the desired value in the form 00 00 00 00 and press Enter The value is subtracted from the timecode To change the value of the timecode click inside a timecode indicator press and the timecode entry window appears Enter the desired value in the form 00 00 00 00 and press Enter The value is changed to the desired timecode If an entry in the timecode entry window is out of bounds it is ignored 00 00 00 00 Figure 123 Timecode entry window The E to E Electronics to Electronics button is to the right of the duration timecode indicator By default E to E is off If you click on this button
229. menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Load button on the current bin display toolbar The clip is loaded onto the capture timeline Enter a name for the subclip in the Clip Name text box This is optional as a default name is automatically generated Move the current position cursor to the desired starting location 4 5 6 7 Click on the Create Mark in button Move the current position cursor to the desired ending location Click on the Create Mark out button The subclip is added to the current bin User Marks You can insert a user mark into a clip so that you can easily jump to that mark later in the editing process You insert the mark by placing the current position cursor and then clicking on the User Mark button A user mark is inserted at the current time cursor position You can jump to user marks by clicking on the Previous Event and Next Event buttons To remove the current user mark 1 2 With the clip loaded on the capture timeline locate the exact frame where the user mark is located using the event and frame controls Choose Timeline Remove Current User Mark To remove all user marks 1 2 Load the clip onto the capture timeline Choose Timeline Remove All User Marks Profile Family 271 T Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Event and Frame Controls The event and frame controls let you navigate the active timeline in forward or re
230. mode Click a panel to make it active Choose Controller Clip Length The Set Clip Marks dialog box appears Figure 79 Enter mark in Enter mark out oo for foo foo for fro frs fio hr min sec frm hr min sec frm T Apply to loaded clip s Figure 79 Set Clip Marks dialog box Enter the mark in and mark out points by specifying the hour minute second and frame settings This applies to future clips only unless you perform step 4 Click Apply to Loaded Clip s if you want the mark in and mark out points to apply to existing clips as well as future clips Click OK 164 Profile Family Configuring a Controller Configuring a Controller To configure the playback and record JPEG or MPEG channels audio channels and the VITC timecodes for the selected controller 1 Click the panel to make it active 2 If any clips are loaded in the panel choose VideoClip Eject All Clips You cannot configure a panel with a controller if any clips are present in it 3 Choose Controller Configure to open the Profile Options dialog box for the selected panel Figure 80 illustrates the standard Profile options with an example configuration selected Figure 81 illustrates the Profile Options dialog box for BVW insert edit also with appropriate selections shown 4 Click on the appropriate video audio and timecode resources for your selected controller Use the scroll bars if necessary to see more resou
231. n box allows you to select which channels you want to monitor Click next to a channel pair to select them You can now adjust line levels for the pair 4 The line level range is 12 to 0 dB If you trim the line level for an individual channel with the slider handle the line level is incremented by 1 dB clicking on either side of the slider handle increments the line level by 0 5 dB The Level boxes show the current line level If you enter a number directly into a Level box the line level number is rounded to the nearest 0 5 dB 5 To adjust the trim for all channels at once use the Group Fader slider While the Group Fader moves all channels at once it maintains the individual channel differences NOTE If the audio interface box is not present the Monitor group will not appear If your system is configured with an XLR 216 digital only chassis channel selection is the only option available in the Monitor Channels group 6 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab 100 Profile Family System Audio Configuration System Audio Configuration To set recording and playback quality or audio scrubbing fg 1 Choose Option Audio Configuration or click the System Audio ta Configuration button The System Audio Configuration dialog box appears Figure 44 System Audio Configuration Cc Hecordng oual Scrubbing 16 bt Enabled 7 bit Playback Wwality 16bit C 20 Bit Close
232. n on the Windows NT desktop Or Choose Start VdrPanel Or Choose Start Programs PDR Applications VdrPanel To start a Profile application such as VdrPanel using Windows NT 3 51 1 In Program Manager double click the PDR Applications program group icon 2 Double click the VdrPanel icon in the PDR Applications program group Viewing Help To view the Help for an application Choose Help Help Topics Or Click the Help button in a dialog box or a toolbar if available To view version information for VdrPanel in this example Choose Help About VdrPanel Closing an Application To close Profile applications Choose File Quit File Exit or click the Close button 32 Profile Family Profile Configuration mcum Closing an Application tion Manager Ele View Option Window Help Manager 3 dtd ej scs s al le Genlock I LTC Input amp Output The Profile Configuration Manager Bl PES Sore 112 5H Video Inpi ut is a graphical user interface for lb Meng configuring reference genlock system timing video and audio inputs and outputs For more information refer to Chapter 2 5 4 Audio Output Using the Profile Configuration P5422 Ret WO Genlock For Help press FT m m w NE RE RN RE Manager EEEEEEEEEERE VgiosoWavoso vau MPEG Siae Manes Fee MEER VA SOYA Not Not Deko Network Known known ET Digtal NOTE You must co
233. n update See Exporting a Cartridge on page 142 and Updating and Inventorying Cartridges on page 144 To archive a bin or clip using a copy command 1 Select the bin in the tree pane or the clip in the contents pane that you want to archive To extend the selection press Shift Up Arrow or Shift Down Arrow Choose Edit Select All or Ctrl A to select all the media in the contents pane 2 Choose Copy either from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar 3 In the tree pane select the partition icon where you want to archive the bin or clip 4 Choose Paste or Paste Special either from the Edit menu or from the right click shortcut menu You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar If there is a bin or clip with the same name in the partition where you want to archive it you are prompted to change the name or cancel the operation Also a clip can only be added to a partition if there is enough space for it Profile Family 137 T Chapter 3 138 Using Media Manager To archive a clip or bin using drag and drop 1 In the tree pane click the cartridge icon where you want to archive a clip This expands the tree pane to reveal the partition icon or icons Click on the bin that you want to copy or from which you want to copy a clip The clip icons from the bin appear in the contents pane In the tree pane select the bin icon or
234. name in the Network Host List The Connection Status dialog box appears while TimeDelay establishes a connection with the selected Profile unit If the connection cannot be established an error message is displayed Press Cancel to return to the Remote Connection dialog box TimeDelay Remote Connection Network Host List Add profile5 pr020909 Remove 128 181 199 237 Cancel Help Figure 170 The Remote Connection dialog box Profile Family 343 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Changing the Remote Connection To connect to a different machine 1 Choose File Remote Connection to open the Remote Connection dialog box 2 Select one of the names in the Network Host List 3 Click on Connect or double click on the name in the Network Host List Changing the machine connection closes the current TimeDelay project If you haven t saved changes to the project you are prompted to save before TimeDelay makes the new connection When the new connection is established the default project settings are used Adding Names to the Network Host List To add a machine to the Network Host List 1 Click the Add button to open the Add Network Host dialog box Add Network Host New Host Name Cancel Figure 171 The Add Network Host dialog box 2 Enter the new machine name This can either be the host name or the machine s IP address Ex 128 181 199 237 3 Click OK to close the Add N
235. nce Genlock dialog box and an offset of nine lines in the Vertical Line Delay under Output Timing Adjustment under Video Output Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is synchronized to the reference genlock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator at the top of the video input dialog box is turned on If you want to use the disk recorder as a switcher and or have the output video correctly timed when in E to E mode the input video must be locked to the reference and properly timed to the disk recorder To aid in the timing setup all video inputs have auto timing circuits which synchronize input video to the internal timing reference as long as the input video is within the auto timing sync window 2 lines for the latest analog composite boards 1 lines for all others To get to the auto timing window input must be advanced 7 1 2 lines The auto timing circuit is always trying to lock to the signal If you try to auto time a signal outside of the window the video signal appears to be broken up as it cannot be timed into the system If the input drifts out of range it is retimed as soon as it drops back into range The disk recorder can use untimed signals if auto timing is not enabled but they are not timed correctly and may cause jumping and skipping in E to
236. nchronized to the reference genlock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on For more information on auto timing see Auto Timing on page 47 Click Enable Dithering if the incoming signal is 10 bit resolution This produces the best quality result The LSB artifacts on 10 bit video feeds are reduced There is no effect if the incoming signal is 8 bit Click Vertical Blanking to enable vertical blanking When enabled for the 525 standard lines 1 through 9 and 264 through 272 are blanked for the 625 standard lines 1 through 5 311 through 317 624 and 625 are blanked Adjust the input gain on the syncs to compensate for any losses in the input You can adjust the gain manually or with earlier cards click AGC Automatic Gain Control which enables the internal quality monitoring circuit to automatically adjust the gain to keep the sync level constant To adjust the gain manually move the slider to the desired value The range is from 71 to 141 percent 3 dB of the input signal For earlier cards the range is from 45 to 142 percent 3 dB of the input signal for NTSC and 82 to 142 percent for PAL When you click Default the Input Gain Adjustment resets to the default value 100 percent 9 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog
237. ndow In each of the procedures that follow itis assumed that you have already connected if necessary to a Profile unit if you are operating remotely and that you have allocated the necessary resources with Resource Manager Manually Starting the TimeDelay Process To start a recording with delayed playback 1 In the Buffer Size edit box enter a record buffer size or accept the default See Setting the Record Buffer Size on page 352 2 In the Playout Delay edit box enter a playout delay Repeat this action for each Playback Panel See Setting a Playout Delay on page 354 3 On the Record Panel click the Record button To stop the TimeDelay process click the All Stop button on the Record Panel 350 Profile Family Automatically Starting the TimeDelay Process Automatically Starting the TimeDelay Process When you select an external VITC or LTC signal as TimeDelay s timecode source you can start the TimeDelay process automatically when a specific timecode value is reached This feature allows you to synchronize multiple Profiles that are using the same external timecode source To automatically begin recording at a set timecode 1 2 3 6 Choose Config Timecode Source Select an external timecode source In the Record Panel click the Auto Start button or choose Config AutoStart The Auto Start dialog box appears see Figure 174 Click the Auto Start check box Enter the desired start time
238. nel 4 Set up the timecode generator used by the panel with the Timecode Generator Settings group Free Run causes the timecode generator to continue to advance regardless of the current play or record mode of the panel Freeze locks the timecode at the current value The value does not advance with time nor with changes in the play or record mode of the panel Lock to Field Number causes the generator to output a timecode locked to the current clip s timecode When the panel is in stop the value freezes When the panel is in play or record the timecode advances normally During rewind or reverse shuttle the timecode runs backward Regenerate pertains to BVW controllers only When the timecode position is changed to a new portion of the clip and a record operation includes recorded timecode tracks which happens with assemble edits from BVE and other controllers the timecode generator is initialized to match the timecode read from the timecode track VITC or LTC before the record occurs The Reset To button resets the timecode to the value entered in the box The generator can be set to this value when Free Run Freeze or Lock to Field Number is selected 5 Click Close Setting Timecode Crosspoints The Timecode Crosspoint dialog box controls the connections of timecode signals within the Profile system Timecode inputs top left corner represent either LTC input connectors on the back panel or VITC input signals Time
239. nel server or any device other than your Profile system refer to the installation manual for that device for instructions 246 Profile Family Editing the Hosts File Editing the Hosts File The next step is to edit the file c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts This file tells the Profile system what IP address is associated with what Profile unit If you enter in all the Profile units IP addresses that are on your network then the same file can be copied onto all the other Profile units This saves you editing each Profile s individual hosts file You can also use a DNS server for name lookup however instructions for using such a server are outside the scope of this manual An alternative to editing the hosts file is to use the PDR Network Configuration service fenes to automatically update and maintain the hosts file For more information on fenes see The PDR Network Configuration Service on page 252 If you want to use fcncs to automatically update your hosts file you must enable auto host table administration by entering the command fcconfig hta on followed by Enter Your c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts file will now be automatically administered by fcncs To update your hosts file manually 1 Open the file in Notepad The format is simple First type the Ethernet IP address followed by the machine name such as PROFILE1 On the next line type the IP address of the Fibre Channel board in that Profile unit then the ma
240. nfigure system resources with Configuration Manager before using your Profile disk recorder Media Manager The Media Manager allows you to manage clips and masters on disk transfer media between systems and archive and restore clips on a library system Refer to Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Transcode Utility The Transcode Utility which is started from Media Manager converts motion JPEG media to MPEG or from MPEG to JPEG You can also change the video quality of a clip Refer also to Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Eie Edt Vie C cm 707 xi Format Modi Ready 000520 MPEG MPEG 5 JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG 22 JPEG 227 JPEG 00001025 00003414 00000712 00001116 00 000304 00001028 00001510 00 001029 mn00427 MPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG JPEG MPEG JPEG Z 03 02 88 05 15 PM 03 08 98 04 55 PM 03 03 98 04 21 PM 03 08 98 04 24 PM 03 04 30 10 24AM 03 03 38 05 07 PM 03 04 98 0948 AM 03 04 38 10 24 AM 03 03 98 04 32 PM 03 04 38 1219 PM 03 04 38 10 27 AM 03 04 38 1219 FM 03 03 88 04 32 PM 03 02 88 02 21 PM 03 02 88 05 54 PM 03 04 38 12 21 PM 03703 380511 PM 03 04 98 09 48 AM 03 04 38 1052 AM 03 04 98 09 42 AM 03 02 88 02 22 PM noise nasa eu d 7 Transcode Utility Fie Eat Hep MEE PA conver Preview Target Eomat Target Qualy d H rcm c3 HE HEZIIH Delete source after conversion
241. ns on the rear panel 2 3 Click the Close button 176 Profile Family Setting Timecode Setting Timecode You can set timecode crosspoints select drop frame timecode or select timecode panel display and generators Selecting How to Display Timecode on a Panel The Timecode Setup dialog box enables you to set the timecode display and the timecode source on a channel to the values required for your application 1 Click in a panel to select it 2 Choose Options Select Timecode to open the Timecode Setup dialog box The Timecode Setup dialog box is divided into two groups Display on Panel and Timecode Generator Settings Panel A Timecode Setup x Display on panel C Lic input C TC Rec 1 C YITC input s Field counter C Generator Timecode generator settings C Free run C Freeze Lock to field Regenerate Reset to oo oo oo foo hr min sec frm Figure 85 Timecode Setup dialog box 3 Select the timecode to be displayed on the panel from the Display on Panel group LTC Input is a separate signal input via the genlock card VITC Input is the timecode from the VITC input signal Profile Family 177 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 178 Compute from Field Number calculates the timecode directly from the field number of the recorded video New clips start at 00 00 00 00 TC Rec displays the recorded timecode Generator displays the timecode from the generator for the chan
242. nsider When you copy a project to and run it on a PC rather than a Profile unit the project still references the original machine name No matter which PC launches the project TimeDelay connects to the same machine A better alternative is to use File Import to import another project s configuration information then save the project again to create a project file that has a different machine name When you copy a project to and run it on a Profile unit the machine name stored in the project does not matter TimeDelay always connects to the local machine What should be considered is different machine capabilities 342 Profile Family Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit Connecting to a Remote Profile Unit You can run TimeDelay on any PC that uses Windows NT 4 0 and connects to a remote Profile unit over an Ethernet local area network LAN When TimeDelay starts on the PC or when you choose File Remote Connection the Remote Connection dialog box shown in Figure 170 appears NOTE TimeDelay remote connection is allowed only when TimeDelay is running on a PC Consequently the TimeDelay Remote Connection dialog box does not appear when TimeDelay is launched on a Profile unit and the File Remote Connection menu item is not available when TimeDelay is running on a Profile unit To connect to a remote Profile unit 1 Select one of the names in the Network Host List 2 Click on Connect or double click on the
243. ntering the new timecodes in the boxes provided see the timecode entry boxes in Figure 122 page 264 Even when trimmed media remains on disk Choose Media Cleanup to remove excess media permanently from a trimmed clip The trimmed portions are removed from disk thus freeing space for more clips Profile Family 269 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor NOTE Media Cleanup works only if no subclips have ben created from a clip If subclips have been created or if the clip is referenced by a master Cleanup will fail Creating a Subclip A subclip is a portion of an existing clip Subclips can help you order your material when creating masters The buttons that allow you to create subclips are the Create Mark in and Create Mark out buttons With the Create Mark in button you mark where you want to start the subclip with the Create Mark out button you specify where you want to end the subclip In addition you can set user marks as points of interest that you can jump to at a later time Clip Name Text Box Create Mark In Create Mark Out Shuttle Rate agd User Mark Shuttle a ce Previous Frame Next Frame Previous Event Next Event User Mark or Edit Figure 129 Create and User Mark buttons plus event and frame controls 270 Profile Family Creating a Subclip To create a subclip 1 2 Select the clip in the current bin from which you want to create a subclip Choose Load from the Media
244. ntroller 0 2 llli eere 161 Selecting a Communications Port 163 Selecting Clip Length BVW Only l l 164 Configuring a Controller llle eee 165 Setting Compression Presets c eee eee eee 168 Selecting Vertical Blanking Interval Storage Lines 171 Setting up BVW insert edit Emulation 172 Setting Louth Modes 0 cece eee 174 Selecting Video Crosspoints e eee ee eee 175 Setting Timecode pee avi sea eave eee ex EXER 177 Selecting How to Display Timecode on a Panel 177 Setting Timecode Crosspoints llle esee 178 Setting Drop Frame Timecode sslellseserss 180 Profile Family 5 T Contents Chapter 5 6 Profile Family Panel Basics s zac ep bp na NG PS Ohne RI NOE 180 Opening a Panel cirie niieg id emia ER ee 186 Making a Panel Active llle 187 Arranging Panels and Icons naaa 187 Viewing Record Capacity cee eee ee 188 Viewing an Audio Monitor for a Panel 00 188 Using CIPS x 190 Defining a New Clip 2 IR 190 Name Clips FitSt 22 4203 shea pata eh RR RR Be 190 Record Clips First je caer e KG RR ree eg 192 Loading and Playing a Clip l l 192 Renaming a Clip onai ER IARE ER Ee ERR d ROUGE 194 Setting Clip Protection llle 195 Striping a Cllp isse dise wadee ne kira ont ae Do ro Pu d 196 Setting Long or Short Clip Names a 196
245. nutes Ww t fa fa C Hourly FT No End Date Time C Daily End Date C Weekly End Time Figure 141 New Transfer Event dialog box 3 In the New Transfer Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 289 4 Click OK 298 Profile Family Scheduling an Archive Event Scheduling an Archive Event You can schedule archive events in your lists An archive event copies media to or from a Profile library system such as the PLS200 The PLS200 must be attached to a Profile system running the Event Scheduler engine 1 Open the list to which you wish to add the live event 2 Choose File New Event Archive and the New Archive Event dialog box appears as shown in Figure 142 New Archive E vent 14 48 11 00 Jo NG End Date Time Figure 142 New Transfer Event dialog box 3 In the New Archive Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 289 4 Click OK Profile Family 299 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Editing Event Lists You can reorganize your event lists at any time While you can change the settings for each event in a list sometimes you ll want to change the order of events or add replace or delete events from the list The following sections describe how to organize your lists to meet your needs Changing the Order of Events You may want to change the order of event
246. o Output J8 A Analog OutA J8 Analog OutA J3 ondas Figure 29 Analog Audio Output dialog box 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name Audio Out 1 for example Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces The window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Related Audio Channels lists the audio channels that are related to the signal name 4 Click Undo to return the signal name to its original name 5 Click Close Profile Family 81 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Digital Audio Output To change the digital audio signal name and transmit group 1 Select Audio Output from the configuration tree and then click or double click a digital audio name from the list Digital Audio Output J8 A SDlAudio OutA J8 Name BDIAudic Outa J8 Associated Video output channel Audio Transmit Group SDI OutA J8 Group 1 Related Audio Channel C Group i C Group 3 SDlAudio OutB J8 SDlAudio OutC J8 C Group 4 SDlAudio OutD J8 Close Ordo Help Figure 30 Digital Audio Output dialog box 2 Enter a new signal name in the Name box Audio Out 1 for example Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces The window title bar name and the c
247. o codecs one for Playback Video and one for Record Video For example use JPEG 3 for Playback Video and JPEG 4 for Record Video Use Controller Configure with the other panels to assure the codecs are not in use Select two pairs of audio channels For example select Chan 9 and Chan 11 for the Playback Audio and Chan 10 and Chan 12 for the Record Audio Audio channel pair selection must follow these rules The playback record audio channel pair must be sequentially numbered For example Chan 1 and Chan 2 or Chan 14 and Chan 15 The playback record pair must be with the same channel group Channels are grouped as sets of four Chan 1 through 4 Chan 5 through 8 Chan 9 through 12 and Chan 13 through 16 The playback is assigned to the first selected codec in the pair record is assigned to the second selected codec in the pair For example playback assigned to Chan 14 and record assigned to Chan 15 NOTE There must be two audio channels assigned for each audio track to be recorded Select two pairs of timecode For example select TCREC 5 and TCREC 7 for the Playback Timecode and TCREC 6 and TCREC 8 for the Record Timecode 6 If any other selections are highlighted click to deselect them Select the video compression to be applied see Setting Compression Presets on page 168 for more information on video compression and the presets Click OK Choose Controller Comm Port to open
248. o view Profile system logs with the graphical log viewer WinTail This log viewer allows you to see the end of a log file To learn more about how to view Profile logs see Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities ProLink monitors Profile Protocol calls over RS 422 communication lines allowing you to use a controller such as the PRC100 Control Panel to communicate with a Profile system For more information on Profile Protocol see the documentation that accompanies the Profile Software Development Kit e PortSever allows you to control a Profile unit remotely using Ethernet communications For example you can run PortServer on a remote Profile system so that you can control it over a LAN from another Profile or PC PortServer is generally used in conjunction with Fibre Channel operations PDR Access Control is a Windows NT service that prevents one application from crashing another application by mistake Though largely transparent to users the service prevents applications from accidentally reloading the video processor while in use essentially providing a controlled gateway to the processor Update Firmware reprograms components on boards in your PDR200 Video File Server such as the Master Enhanced Disk Recorder EDR board Updating the firmware in the selected components of these boards ensures that software and hardware will function together as expected Update Fibre Channel Microcode updates the microcode on Fibre Channel
249. ocode version from file gfcucode img is 1 7 3 Transferring microcode to Enhanced Disk Recorder master Requesting Enhanced Disk Recorder master to flash new microcode New microcode installed successfully EF FE aZaZaZaFakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakakad You must now reboot your system for changes to take effect a2 Press Enter to continue Figure 116 The Update FC Microcode window Chapter Fibre Channel Video Networking With Fibre Channel you can copy and move media between a network of Profile systems at faster than real time To transfer data across Fibre Channel the Profile system needs both the Ethernet and Fibre Channel networks to communicate The Ethernet local area network LAN carries commands between Profile disk recorders and the Fibre Channel connections send raw video data Both networks use TCP IP Transfer Control Protocol Internet Protocol Because of this communication scheme you must set up separate IP addresses for each network In the example that follows you will connect two Profile units together configure them and run Fibre Channel transfers between them NOTE To communicate across the network all Fibre Channel machines should have Profile system software version 2 4 installed You must first configure your network whether your Profile unit came from the factory with a Fibre Channel card installed or whether you have
250. og box appears similar to the one shown in Figure 112 Make appropriate compression settings for your recordings and click OK Refer to Using VdrPanel on page 159 for an explanation of these settings Configure JPEG 525 Line Compression E3 50000 Bytes Field C 75000 Bytes Field C 100000 Bytes Field Figure 111 Setting JPEG compression Profile Family 219 Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities 220 Configure MPEG Compression x Format ci 5 P per GOP 2 ii B per P zi Bit rate Mb Sec 6 First Encoded Line an Last Encoded Line C 42 0 IV Close GOP fa PieStrurrane Figure 112 Setting MPEG compression 2 Select one or more audio inputs The output that corresponds to each input is automatically selected Click the Add Audio button 3 Select timecode input tracks and output and click Add Timecode Repeat the process for each timecode resource you wish to add 4 Click the Create File button to save the file When the Save As dialog box appears enter a file name that your application will use when it opens the port The configuration file should be stored in the default C profile configs directory and must have a cfg extension For example you must create vtrl cfg vtr2 cfg etc files for use with the PRC 100 5 Choose OK to write the configuration file You have now completed creating a configuration file for your Profile Protocol application Use this file when
251. ollowing is displayed usage fcconfig options options Ba fc ip address dotted decimal g gateway dotted decimal n subnet mask dotted decimal a hardware address 1 120 0 for autoconfig t on off enable disable tcp checksums hta on off enable disable auto host table admin lt on off gt enable disable use of the switch 244 Profile Family Fibre Channel IP Address Set Up 3 For PROFILE1 in this example type the following NOTE Do not reboot when prompted 192 168 100 1 followed by Enter FC IP address set to 100 100 100 1 Reboot computer for settings to take effect fcconfig g 255 255 255 0 followed by Enter Gateway set to 255 255 255 0 Reboot computer for settings to take effect NOTE Based on the address you use for a subnetmask there is an implicit subnetmask but you can override this with a larger mask For example 255 0 0 0 can be overridden by 255 255 0 0 or 255 255 255 0 fcconfig a 1 followed by Enter Address set to 1 Reboot computer for settings to take effect NOTE The hardware address can be any number between 1 and 120 In these examples use 1 for PROFILE1 and 2 for PROFILE2 No two hardware addresses should be the same on the network fcconfig t off followed by Enter TCP IP checksums are now disabled Reboot computer for settings to take effect fcconfig hta off followed by Enter Auto host table administration set to off Reboot computer for
252. omment ved Repeat Hour s Minutes Cine bw CA fa C Hourly Je NG End Date Time a Daily End Date C Weekly End Time l Figure 138 Creating a play event 294 Profile Family Scheduling Recording Operations Scheduling Recording Operations You can schedule recording operations to take place automatically at predetermined times For example you may want to record a satellite feed during off hours Scheduling a recording operation is just as simple as a playback 1 Open the list to which you are adding the recording event 2 Choose File New Event Record to open the New Record Event dialog box as shown in Figure 139 New Record E vent x Clip Name Stat Time 14421717 Duration 0545342 Type absoute gt Start Date 11 17 1998 Comment Kam r Repeat Hour s Minutes 6 None ew fa fa C Hourly NG End Date Time C Daily End Date C Weekly End Time TN Figure 139 Creating a record event 3 In the New Record Event dialog box enter all the event information as described in Changing Event Settings on page 289 The clip is stored in the default bin with the name you enter in the Clip Name box 4 Click OK Profile Family 295 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Scheduling Rules and Constraints Rule 1 Absolute events always start at the scheduled time Of multiple absolute events inserted at the same time the last inserted absolute event is the on
253. on NOTE To add a Profile machine to the network host list see Connecting to a Remote Machine on 110 258 Profile Family Selecting a Current Bin Selecting a Current Bin After you have acquired resources and chosen operational settings you are ready to start editing First let s discuss some basics With the Tool Box Editor you edit media such as clips and masters The capture timeline lets you capture video and audio clips while the edit timeline allows you to edit a sequence clips into a master A bin is simply a collection of masters and clips The current bin is the set of media displayed in the current bin display See Figure 120 By default the current bin is the first or top bin displayed in Media Manager The current bin display helps you focus on and work with a set of clips and masters Above the display the column headers are shown Click on the column header bar by pointing the mouse pointer at the header and pressing the left mouse button The media files are then sorted according the criteria of the columns You can also view sort media in the current display in several other ways showing all media at once default clips only or masters only To select a view simply click on the view bar above the contents pane and choose a menu item You can also customize how you sort the media by name type or date or all three at once Selecting and sorting views is useful when you have a lot of media on disk
254. on It also will update the c winn system32 drivers etc hosts file if the feconfig hta option is set to on and only if it is set to on This service has the following standard command line options fcncs install installs the service on the system The service starts automatically when installed fcncs remove removes the service from the system fcncs start starts the service fcncs stop stops the service 252 Profile Family Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Storing media on a Profile system rather than on tape opens the door to almost instant access to video and audio material Media is available to all of Profile s channels at once so you can play a video on more than one channel at the same time Since each of the channels up to four is independent playback can start at a different time and place in a clip One of the best features of the Profile system is that you can start playing material while it s still being recorded The basic element of digitally stored video and audio is the clip A clip is a reference to video audio and timecode material recorded in media files on Profile disks A clip has a beginning and an end and when first recorded the beginning and end correspond to the first and last frames stored in the media file A clip may refer to the entire media file or just part of it When you delete a clip the media file that the clip referred to remains on disk only the reference to the media file is dele
255. on unit or a RAID unit Once you have configured your video and audio boards and if necessary rebuilt your file system you are ready to capture and replay video and audio clips Refer to Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel To configure your Fibre Channel board see Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking To read Profile logs access your Profile system from a remote PC or attach a PRC100 Profile Control Panel refer to Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities To learn how to manage media on disk or over Fibre Channel on a Profile network see Chapter 3 Using Media Manager If want to use optional software applications see Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Chapter 9 Using the List Manager or Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay To allocate resources for Tool Box Editor List Manager and TimeDelay see Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Profile Family 29 T Chapter 1 30 Introducing the Profile Family Starting Your Profile System Once the unit is properly installed you are ready to log in For instructions on how to install and power on a PDR 100 PDR200 or PDR300 see the installation manual that came with the unit To log in automatically Power up the Profile unit and the start up routine begins During normal start up you are logged in automatically and the VdrPanel application starts You can hold down the Shift key during start up to interrupt the automatic log in process NOTE
256. ond When copying source and destination paths are constructed using the machine volume bin clip names A destination clip name may be different from the source clip name if the clip was renamed when pasted or moved to the new location which has to be done when a clip with the same name already appears at the new location The Library tab divides entries into four columns operation source destination and percent complete Library operations that occur in the background include archive restore inventory update format delete import clean and export The destination column is only filled in for the archive and restore operations The percent complete column will show Pending while a cartridge is being loaded into a transport and cued to the correct tape position NOTE Only network library archive and library restore transactions can be cancelled To interrupt a transfer do the following 1 Click the Network or Library tab depending on the type of transfer you wish to interrupt 2 Select the transaction you wish to interrupt 3 Click the Cancel Transaction button This button is unavailable unless the transaction is highlighted The label for this button is context specific If an archive transaction was selected the button is labeled Cancel Archive If a network copy was selected the button is labeled Cancel Transfer Profile Family 157 T Chapter 3 Using Media Manager machine may have unexpectedly run out of
257. onfiguration Manager Serial Digital Component Video Output To open the Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box 1 Select Video Output from the configuration tree and then click or double click a digital component output from the list such as SDI OutA J5 The Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box appears see Figure 25 Digital Component Video Output J5 A SDI OutA J5 dvanced r VITC Generator Setting _ Name 8DI Owa s5 VITC Generator Enable VITC SDI OutA J5VITC 10 23 nal i fro Mine oup als Na fiz Timing Adjustment Line Fine VITC Erase Enable p a D E 10 23 Start Kasa PA 0 Defaut End AERA EM Close Ada Heb Figure 25 Serial Digital Component Video Output dialog box 2 Enter a new name in the Name box to change the signal name For example if the signal named SDI OutA J13 is a dedicated signal to a main switcher you could rename it to Switcher 1 The VITC name automatically tracks the signal name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Under VITC Generator Setting you can place VITC vertical interval timecode on specified lines and or erase lines in the vertical interval If VITC Generator Enable is selected VITC is placed on the lines given in VITC Generator Line 1 and 2 If you only want one lin
258. onfiguration dialog box Input Mapping tab Profile Family 93 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager 94 Audio Signal Processing Board 1 J6 x Input Mapping Input Clocking Output Mapping Monitor Channels OutA J6 OutA J6 OutA J5 OutB J5 DIC O O O AAAH a s 5 s o en 4 co rs O oo EN o e h 07 LEER o ES e Figure 41 Audio Configuration dialog box Output Mapping tab The columns represent the sources to the sixteen channels on the input side and the destinations from the sixteen channels on the output side The examples in Figure 40 and Figure 41 illustrate the system with a PAC 208 chassis allowing the selection of analog channels 1 8 and digital channels 9 16 A PAC 216 chassis however provides sixteen analog inputs and outputs or sixteen digital inputs and outputs For the PAC 208 rows 9 through 16 of the analog channel column and rows 1 through 8 of the AES EBU channel column are cross hatched to indicate that these channels are not selectable In Figure 41 in the column labeled AES EBU rows 9 16 appear dimmed indicating that this audio type is always mapped and cannot be unmapped Attempting to remap this section results in an error message The number of columns in the mapping grid depends on the number of possible input or output audio types that may be mapped to or from the disk recorder channels The grid is used for selecting which of the p
259. onfiguration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 3 Click a group name 1 4 under Audio Transmit Group to change the audio transmit 4 Associate Video Output Channel lists the name of the associated video output channel 5 Related Audio Channels lists the audio channels that are related to the signal name 6 Click Undo to return the signal name to its original name 7 Click Close 82 Profile Family PDR200 Audio PDR200 Audio The PDR200 audio architecture accepts and simultaneouly processes sixteen audio inputs and outputs at up to four simultaneous clock rates Internally all audio is processed in floating point at 48kHz with a selectable storage resolution of 16 or 20 bits Inputs may be individually clocked in groups of four and any clock group may be referenced to the system reference house black or any one of four video inputs Output clocking is synchronous to system reference Sample rate conversion is available for all inputs 30 to 50kHz providing uniform storage at 48kH7 The PDR200 can be configured to operate with analog AES EBU digital or embedded SMPTE 272M Level A audio depending on which options are installed in your system All three audio formats are supported without external conversion equipment Analog audio is only available with an optional PAC208 or PAC216 Analog D
260. ord of those contents in the library database This usually occurs when the cartridges have been added or removed by hand without appropriate inventories which is not recommended The inventory operation rescans the barcodes of the cartridges in the library and updates the database to the actual library contents To inventory the contents of the library 1 Select a library icon in the tree pane 2 Choose Inventory from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click Since this operation may take several minutes Media Manager asks you to confirm that you want to inventory the entire library Confirm Inventory x The library may be unavailable for some operations while it is a Are you sure you want to do a full inventory of the library being inventoried Figure 67 Confirm Inventory dialog box 3 Click Yes to inventory the entire library The inventory operation like all library operations is processed in the background This allows you to continue working with the Media Manager while the operation is being performed The Transfer Monitor tool is used to view background transactions To view the Transfer Monitor click the Profile logo or choose Tools Transfer Monitor Profile Family Formatting Cartridges Formatting Cartridges When you format one or more cartridges all storage space is reallocated and the cartridge is prepared to accept new data To format one or more cartridges 1 Select the cartr
261. ossible input or output audio sources and destinations to map to the channels Audio channels are mapped in groups of four channels only and the four audio channels are always mapped to consecutive disk channels For example analog channels 1 4 Input 01 Input 04 in the first column of Figure 40 are mapped to the first four disk Profile Family Input and Output Mapping recorder channels Ch 01 Ch 04 while digital channels 9 12 Input 09 Input 12 in Figure 41 are mapped to another four disk recorder channels Ch 09 Ch 12 In another example channels 1 4 may be mapped to analog channels 5 8 mapped to AES EBU and so forth In addition analog and AES EBU audio types have an assigned one to one mapping to their respective channels that is input 1 always maps to channel 1 input 2 to channel 2 and so on EUM Serial digital embedded audio contains sixteen audio channels grouped into Grp Ch four groups of four channels Each group can be assigned to any group of four e ae channels For example group 1 Grp1 may be assigned to channels 1 4 ChI Ch4 5 8 Ch5 Ch8 9 12 Ch9 Ch12 or 13 16 Ch13 Ch16 However a maximum of two of the four groups from a serial digital video source may be used simultaneously Grp1 Ch4 Grp2 Ch5 e Grp2 Ch Grp2 Ch Grp2 Ch8 Input Mapping The Input Mapping tab is used for mapping input channels to Profile disk channels The channels must be mapped
262. ote that this inter operable microcode has not yet been optimized for loop operations Follow these instructions to use either of these icons to load Fibre Channel microcode 1 Close any applications that may be running on the system 2 At a command line type vdrsvc start and then press Enter This starts the PDR Access Service if it is not already started 3 Choose Start Programs PDR Debug Tools Update FC Microcode window appears 4 The program asks if you want to continue Type Y 5 The program now reads the new image of the microcode from c profile etc gfcucode img The program automatically copies the old microcode to the file c profile etc gfcucode old Profile Family 239 Chapter 6 240 Using Profile Utilities 6 Restart the disk recorder in order for the microcode update to take effect Use the Fibre Channel Configuration dialog box or the fcconfig command to verify that switch mode is on or off according to your needs Each icon establishes settings that should be appropriate for most uses Use the Fibre Channel Configuration dialog box or the fcconfig command to verify that switch mode is on or off according to your needs Each icon establishes settings that should be appropriate for most uses Update FC microcode program will re flash the microcode in the Genr C to exit at any time Checking microcode version in Fibre Channel card gfcB Loaded microcode version is 1 7 3 New micr
263. other channels are playback channels You cannot remove the first two channels because TimeDelay always requires a record channel and at least one playback channel You can have as many as 6 playback channels For more detailed information about using Resource Manager refer to Using the Resource Manager on page 313 Adding a Playback Channel To add a playback channel 1 Choose Config Resource Manager to open Resource Manager 2 Click the Add Channel button This creates a new channel tab in the Resource Manager dialog box 3 Configure the new channel as necessary Instructions for using Resource Manager are in Using the Resource Manager on page 313 4 Click the OK button When you close the Resource Manager dialog box a new playback panel is displayed in the TimeDelay window Deleting a Playback Channel To remove a playback channel 1 Choose Config Resource Manager to open Resource Manager 2 Click on the channel tab that you want to remove 3 Click the Remove Channel button to delete the selected channel tab 4 Click the OK button When you close the Resource Manager dialog box the panel that corresponded to the removed channel is no longer displayed in the TimeDelay window 346 Profile Family Configuring Channels with Resource Manager Because TimeDelay always needs a record channel and at least one playback channel Resource Manager will not let you delete the record channel or the last playback c
264. ou can set a temporary beginning and ending to a clip by marking an in point an out point or both The video and audio data is not lost however it simply is not used when the clip is played For example if you set a mark in point five seconds into a clip it plays at the five second mark instead of at the beginning but if you remove a mark in it returns the beginning of the clip to the actual clip start NOTE Setting in and out marks applies to Panel Control only It is not recommended for other protocols 200 Profile Family Setting Marks Setting Marks To set a new in mark and out mark in a clip 1 Click a panel to select it 2 Create a clip load a clip or load a clip list and then select a clip from the list The Clip Position Bar is all the way to the left and the Timecode is 00 00 00 00 3 Use the transport controls drag the Clip Position Bar or click on the Timecode display to enter a timecode to locate the frame where you want to set the in mark EF 4 Click Set In Mark The Timecode display remains the same but the Clip Position Bar jumps to the far left indicating the mark in point on the clip 5 Use the transport controls drag the Clip Position Bar or click on the Timecode display to enter a timecode to locate the frame where you want to set the out mark EF 6 Click Set Out Mark The Timecode display remains the same but the Clip Position Bar jumps to the far right indicating the mark out point of t
265. ox To compensate for the 29 97 frame rate in NTSC drop frame timecode synchronizes the rate with elapsed time Drop frame timecode drops two frames per minute except on the tenth minute PAL on the other hand has a constant rate of 25 frames per second and never requires drop frame timecode Resolving Resource Conflicts Resource conflicts occur when you attempt to allocate a resource that is already in use either by the application you are working with or by another application To resolve a conflict you must either request a resource that is available or free the resource that you want from its other use Resource Manager uses color coding to indicate the status of a resource If a resource such as a video output is in use its listing is dimmed grayed out If you request a resource that is in use its listing turns red indicating a conflict Resource Manager also uses Tool Tips to provide additional information about resources that are in use When you hold the cursor for a short period of time over a resource that is in use gray or in conflict red a Tool Tip appears with status information about that resource Tool Tips do not appear for resources that are available Profile Family 335 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager When the resource is being used by another of the applications that use Resource Manager the Tool Tip supplies the name of the application using the resource and the Profile unit or PC on which
266. ox appears 3 Click the Add button The Add Tape Transport dialog box appears as shown in Figure 74 154 Profile Family Viewing Tape Transport Status Add Tape Transport x Transport Num f Robot Position Cancel Help Figure 74 Add Tape Transport dialog box 4 Enter the logical transport number 0 255 5 Enter the physical robot position 0 3 6 Click OK 7 Click Close when you are done viewing the transport status To remove a tape transport from service e Click the appropriate Disable button To clean a tape transport e Click the appropriate Clean button A tape transport does not need cleaning until the Needs Cleaning message appears beside the Clean button The library system will find the first available cleaning cartridge in the system and use it to clean the selected transport If the library system is unable to find the cleaning cartridge that is there is no cleaning cartridge in the library you will get a message stating that no cleaning cartridge was found Profile Family 155 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Viewing the Transfer Monitor When clips are copied to a different machine the media that is referenced by those clips is also copied This is made possible by using a combination of Ethernet and Fibre Channel networks Ethernet is used for lower speed database transfers and queries The high speed Fibre Channel network is used for transferring the actual media between
267. point indicator C or c Column 8 D or S for default or schedule crosspoints Scheduled crosspoint connections take precedence during playback default crosspoints take effect at all other times or in the absence of scheduled crosspoints Typically scheduled and default crosspoints are used in sets of three to define playback and E to E modes as follows Default connection of an input to an output E E Default connection of an input to a codec for recording Scheduled connection of the codec to the output to override E E during PB A configuration file should only have crosspoint lines for video and timecode The sample configuration files that follow provide examples of resource and crosspoint lines Profile Family 227 T Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities Sample Configuration Files The following sample configuration files demonstrate how to create a basic file and how to add features which the Profile Protocol Resources utility does not support such as assigning two codecs for one channel You ll find these and other sample configuration files in the c profile configs directory Basic Configuration This example shows how to create a basic configuration file format is 2 digit base 10 numbers format XX YY funcl func2 starting col 1 format if coll is not between O amp 9 its a comment format optional parameters with white space separators start in col 6
268. pointer on this line in either direction with the mouse Click any button to the left of the internal reference genlock or video output signal name and the timing edit box appears in the bottom left of the System Timing dialog box see Figure 8 which shows the dialog box when the outputs are E to E timed In the timing edit box you can adjust the number of fields genlock only or lines and also tune these settings with course or fine adjustments You can enter a number directly or click an arrow to adjust a setting The adjustments and ranges available vary depending on the type of output you have Click Close to accept the settings Undo to return to the previous settings Default to return to the default settings NOTE You must restart your unit for the new system timing setting to take effect Profile Family Setting the System Timing You can also fine tune your system timing settings individually under Reference Genlock System Input Advanced Adjustment in the Reference Genlock dialog box You can also tune individual output settings under Output Timing Adjustment in under Video Output p LULL AA LLL Figure 7 System Timing dialog box zero timed Profile Family 45 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager E to E Timed Outputs In some applications you may want to precisely switch an output from a live video feed to playback of recorded material Since the live input will be delayed
269. predictive picture used in MPEG video compression MPEG uses motion prediction to increase efficiency that is it reduces data by not duplicating pixels that do not change from frame to frame A B picture relies on data from both forward and backward motion vectors to determine how a future frame will be composed See GOP I frame P Picture Button on the display A small display box that has a raised appearance and contains text Generally clicking on a button activates a function or performs some action See Clicking Button on the mouse The two or three buttons on the top of the mouse 366 Profile Family Glossary Capture Generally the act of storing digital audio and video in memory or on a disk The process may involve converting an analog signal to a digital one Some compression of the digital data may be involved Cartridge tape A tape used in the library that stores video and audio in digital form CD ROM Compact Disc Read Only Memory the preferred medium for multimedia storage because of its large capacity high quality ease of use and low cost Channel A collection of video audio and timecode resources used for either playing or recording Chroma A term that describes the saturation or vividness of a color A chroma of 0 describes a neutral gray color Chroma ranges to the most vivid color a screen or printer generates for a specific hue and value See Hue Cleaning cartridge A special tape
270. project file To ensure that TimeDelay restarts in case of a crash add the project file name to the pdrstart bat file as described in Launching a Project at Start up on page 342 Profile Family 357 Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Setting Audio Levels The audio meters in the Record Panel include sliders that allow you to control the audio level as you record Click and drag the audio level controls to the desired record level for each audio track Similar controls in the Player panel allow you to control the playback level of the audio TDelay tdx TimeDelay Of x File View Config Help Buffer Size 00 00 25 00 Al Stop 00 00 00 00 Show Hide Record Auto Start Meters button mv mat ma2 E E 240 I E 10 0 0 0 20 0 0 00 l Record level sliders Show Hide Meters button Figure 177 The audio level controls 358 Profile Family Using the Interface Using the Interface This is a reference section that contains descriptions of the operating controls and menus found in the TimeDelay window It is divided into three sections the Record Panel the Playback panel and the Menus The Record Panel The following is an overview of the record panel controls Panel Name Buffer Size Timecode Display Record Button Auto Start Button Displays the record channel name The default record channel name is Recorder You can change the channel name using the Resource Manager
271. put You may have analog composite component analog CAV or serial digital component video inputs installed in your Profile system The steps to configure video inputs follow Analog Composite Video Input The indicators at the top of the dialog box show the current status of the analog composite video input The indicators are VITC Present Input Locked and Auto Timed also Burst Present for earlier analog composite cards A green light indicates that a status is on These are indicators and cannot be edited To configure analog composite video input 1 Select Video Input from the configuration tree and then click or double click an analog composite input from the list such as Composite InA J5 The Analog Composite Video Input dialog box appears Figure 12 for current analog composite cards and Figure 13 for earlier cards Analog Composite Video Input J5 Composite InA J5 Figure 12 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Main tab A 52 Profile Family Analog Composite Video Input Analog Composite Video Input J5 Composite InA J5 Main Advanced Control Vertical Interval Overwritable Video Standard e Q o NTSC wPedestal VITC Burst Input Auto C NTSC w oPedestal Present Present Locked Timed C PAL Name Compasite InA J5 Iv Enable Auto Timing Enable Dither VITC Composite V InA J5 VITC Reader Setting 4 Input Gain Adjustment Iv Automatic VITC
272. put 71 Monitoring a list 293 Motion JPEG 24 Mouse 374 Moving media in Media Manager 117 MPEG 21 23 130 170 281 374 Profile Family 387 T Index MPEG encoders assigning 217 N Name column 290 Network host list add or remove machine 111 Networking video 241 New Bin 260 New clips 190 New Master 260 Normal 183 Normal vertical interval 61 Notch 56 61 NTSC 26 374 O Odetics 28 162 Off line cartridge 374 onfiguration files creating 220 Open Bin 260 Opening a list 303 Out marks 184 200 Output mapping 96 Overload status 85 P P picture 22 170 376 P1 through P8 163 PAL 26 126 263 374 Panel Back One Field 185 basics 180 Bounce 183 Profile Family Clip Name Box 185 Clip Position Bar 184 Fast Forward 182 Field Selection 182 Forward One Field 185 Go to Clip Beginning 185 Go to Clip End 185 Group Name Box 184 Loop 183 making active 187 Normal 183 PB EE 183 Play 182 Playback 183 Record 182 Remove In Mark 184 Remove Out Mark 184 Rewind 182 Set In Mark 184 Set Out Mark 184 Shuttle Bar 185 Shuttle Rate 184 185 Stop 182 tiling 187 Timecode 181 Trim from Out Mark 184 Trim to In Mark 184 Panel control 161 Parameter 375 Parent Event column 291 Partitions 375 Pass On Y 61 Paste Special 117 PB EE 183 PDR 100 24 PDR 200 24 PDR 300 24 PDR Access Control 235 PDR Network Configuration Service 252 PDR 100 Audio 77 PDR200 Audio 83 PDR200 Installation Manual 18 PDX 208 2
273. r 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility NOTE Locked versions of the following optional applications Tool Box Editor List Manager and TimeDelay were shipped to you with version 2 5 system software You can use the software for a limited time only Unlocking this software for permanent use requires an additional purchase Click Purchase in the timelock dialog box for information on how to purchase this software 34 Profile Family Closing an Application Tool Box Editor The optional Tool Box Editor lets you create new media by logging and capturing video and audio clips while also providing an inexpensive cuts only editing system Refer to Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor sr el sed SN K EE EI o uH o List M t PROFILESO o Proies Options Hep E A List Manager The optional List Manager allows you to set up simple station automation You can record incoming video at predetermined times send incoming video directly to an output or combine all of these functions to increase the automation level of you operations Refer to Chapter 9 Using the List Manager now TimeDelay A TimeDelay allows you to delay incoming video by an amount of time you specify For more information see Chapter 11 Using 0400 0000 TimeDelay EM Profile Family 35 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family 36 Profile Utilities Profile Logs allow you t
274. r Description Unlocked Error Receiver unlocked Validity Error AES receiver validity Parity Error Parity error CRC Error CRC subframe errors Emphasis Detected emphasis Profile Family 87 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager If you want to bypass the sample rate converter 1 In the Digital Audio Input dialog box click the Sample Rate Converter tab Figure 35 By default the sample rate converter is enabled The sample rate converter affects all four channel inputs Digital Audio Inputs J12 Inputs 9 12 Figure 35 Digital Audio Input dialog box Sample Rate Converter tab 2 Click Bypass Sample Rate Converter NOTE Do not bypass sample rate conversion unless you are certain that all inputs and outputs are synchronous 3 After you have disabled the sample rate converter click Close or another tab 88 Profile Family Analog Audio Output Analog Audio Output In analog audio output you can change audio channel names change line modes for XLR connectors or adjust individual or group line levels in decibels Click Undo if you want to cancel any changes or click Help for context sensitive Help To configure analog audio output 1 Expand Audio Output and then click one of the Analog Channels to bring up the Analog Audio Output dialog box The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical output connectors on the audio output box Ch 01 refers to the first conne
275. r sending or accepting information and control between programs and machines Keyboard An alphanumeric input device that allows communication with software applications Library system The Profile Library System PLS 200 is a robotic tape library that provides affordable mass storage for the Profile video disk recorder LTC Longitudinal Time Code is typically an analog audio track or a dedicated address channel on a tape LTC cant be read in still mode and may not be reliable during low speed shuttle operations Media files Audio video and timecode sources that have been captured by the Profile disk recorder are considered media Media is stored on disk as media files Audio and video clips do not contain media but instead reference positions in a media file Memory A component of a computer system used for virtually instantaneous temporary storage and retrieval of information data or instructions programs Information in memory is volatile and is lost when the computer is shut down Storing information on a permanent storage device such as a hard disk or a tape allows for retrieval during another work session Menu A list of commands or functions that you select with a pointer A menu is normally displayed in a small window Profile Family 373 T Glossary Monitor Two channel audio output of selected machine tracks Generally audio systems or video displays used in a studio environment to control quality
276. rces NOTE Recording format depends on the selected video resource either JPEG or MPEG Rec 5 Click OK Profile Family 165 A Lj Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel Profile Options MPEG Rec 1 7MPEGReci2 MPEG Play 1 vAudio 7 OTC Rec 7 Figure 80 Profile Options dialog box 166 Profile Family Configuring a Controller Profile Options MPEG Play 1 MPEG Play 2 MPEG Play 3 MPEG Rec 1 MPEG Rec 2 Figure 81 Profile Options dialog box BVW insert edit only Profile Family 167 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 168 Setting Compression Presets The Profile Options dialog box lets you select a video compression preset and edit the preset values 1 Click the desired compression preset The options range from highest quality which uses the most disk space and records less material to the lowest quality which uses much less disk space and records more material A custom setting is also available 2 Edit the preset values Referto Table 8 for the JPEG factory set preset values and to Table 9 for the MPEG values To change the values click Edit Presets to open the Edit Compression Presets dialog box shown in Figure 82 You can change the values of the presets if desired Select the preset in the Preset Name box change the values under JPEG or MPEG and then click OK Table 8 Factory set values for JPEG compression presets 525
277. re blanked Click an appropriate format under Select Video Input Format 10 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings Click Close to accept all inputs Profile Family 63 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Serial Digital Component Video Input You can configure serial digital component video input with the Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box The current status indicators shown at the top of the dialog box are Video Present VITC Present and Auto Timed The green light indicates that a particular status is on These indicators cannot be edited To configure serial digital component video input 1 Select Video Input on the configuration tree and then click or double click a digital component input from the list such as SDI InA J13 The Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box appears Figure 19 ponent Video Input J5 SDI InA J5 o o e Video VITC Auto Present Present Timed Name 80HnA J5 Overwritable Video Standard 3 VITC SDEVITC InA J5 525 Video Standard VITC Reader Setting C 625 Video Standard Iv Automatic VITC detect Enable Auto Timing Enable Dither 10 to 8 bit video Close Uno Heb Figure 19 Serial Digital Component Video Input dialog box 2 If you prefer enter the new signal name in the Name box For example if SDI InA J13 is a dedicated satellite feed you could rename i
278. rizontal level from 100 to 100 ms Fine Horizontal level from 100 to 100 ms Use the Line Course or Fine boxes to set the timing adjustment amounts When the timing adjustments are done with a waveform monitor you can visually move the signal so that it matches the reference Click Default to reset the values to 0 which is the point where the output signal timing is aligned with the reference genlock signal Under Procamp Adjustment you can modify the output signal to compensate for any irregularities in the signal path All changes take place immediately Enable Procamp must be checked before anything in this group can be adjusted This enables you to setup the Procamp and then disable it without losing the setup Luminance enabled specifies only the luminance portion of the signal is output The signal is black and white Gaussian Chroma Filter determines the type of filter used on the chrominance portion of the signal If the Gaussian Chroma Filter is selected the filter has a long slow roll off to prevent ringing If it is not selected then a brickwall filter is used Although this may introduce ringing into the signal it maintains the integrity of the signal for multiple processing Use the Gaussian Filter as a last step before transmission and if ringing suppression is required Do not use this filter if you are doing multiple processes passes on the signal or if the material is in component form
279. rnal video router and the external video signal An example is a composite analog input channel This path takes a composite analog video signal and converts it to 8 bit component parallel digital and places it on the video router Another example is the component serial digital output This path takes component parallel digital video from the video router and converts to serial digital component format Video disk recorder server A device such as the PDR200 Video File Server that stores audio and video as digital information on disks VITC Vertical Interval Time Code is encoded into the video lines at the start of field VITC can be read during still frames but becomes unreliable at frame rates faster than normal play speed such as fast shuttle operations Video router The video path through a system The crosspoint circuitry that routes the video within the Profile video disk recorder is a router Volume A volume is a logical set of disks such as the disks in a PDR 100 or a PDR 200 which are used as a grouping of disks for the storage of audio and video information Volumes may also consist of a PDX 103 or PDX208 Disk Expansion unit or a PRS200 or PRS250 Profile RAID System Profile Family 379 T Glossary 380 Profile Family Index Numerics 4 2 0 170 4 2 2 24 170 A A to D 365 Absolute event type 291 300 Access Control 235 Access Time 365 Actions in List Manager 291 Adding a Profile machine 110 Ad
280. rofile Family 305 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Importing a List You can import a list that has been previously exported to an ASCII text file Ist To import a file 1 Click the Edit window tab 2 Choose File Import An Open dialog box appears displaying files of type lst in the path c profile 3 Select the name of the file you want to import Double click the file name or click OK Deleting an Entire List To remove an entire list Choose Edit Delete List 306 Profile Family Overriding Events in a List Overriding Events in a List Not every operation in your environment can be predicted to the second In some instances you ll want to be able to interrupt an event as it s playing or stop a list completely List Manager provides you with the tools you need to meet these challenges Taking an Event As your list executes you may want to manually choose a particular event and start playing it immediately For example you may have inserted a very long Switch event to use a live feed but you now want to run a commercial List Manager lets you immediately use any event in your list 1 Schedule your list normally 2 Monitor the list by clicking the Monitor tab Make sure you can see the channel that will execute the event you wish to take 3 Highlight the event that you want to use immediately 4 Click the Take button The event begins five seconds later 5 The list will continue runnin
281. rom 5 0 to 5 bPerIP The number of B pictures per IP picture 2 from 0 to 2 PixStruct Reserved Must be 0 0 FirstEncoded May include VBI lines See release notes 21 525 60 Line 23 625 50 Manually Editing a Configuration File Table 12 MPEG Encoder Parameters LastEncoded Line The number of total encoded lines is the difference between the first and last encoded lines and must be a multiple of 16 In 525 60 total encoded lines is typically 240 in 625 50 total encoded lines is typically 288 The last encoded line must not exceed 263 525 60 or 311 625 50 The first encoded line is inclusive meaning it is actually an encoded line but the last encoded line is exclusive meaning that the line specified is not actually encoded 261 525 60 311 625 50 For audio codecs input level output level window size If you don t specify parameters the default values are used You can override the defaults in the cfg file or by using the API calls Acceptable values for these parameters are shown in Table 13 Table 13 Audio Parameters still frame operations Parameter Acceptable Values Default input level From 0 0 full attenuation to 1 0 no 1 0 attenuation output level From 0 0 full attenuation to 1 0 no 1 0 attenuation window size Number of audio fields to play during video 1 Profile Family 225 T Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities
282. rom and To lines to look for the VITC signals If Automatic VITC detect is not used the disk recorder expects to find the VITC signals on the VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 40 If the signal is found the VITC Present indicator is turned on NOTE Input must be auto timed to use automatic VITC detection Tochange Input Gain Adjustment move the slider to the desired value The range is from 70 percent to 140 percent 3 dB for the input signal for both 525 and 625 When you click on Default the Input Gain Adjustment resets to the default value 100 percent If you want video input auto timed click Enable Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is synchronized to the reference genlock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indicator is turned on For more information on auto timing see Auto Timing on page 47 Click Enable Dithering if the incoming signal is 10 bit resolution This will produce the best quality result The LSB artifacts on 10 bit video feeds are reduced There is no effect if the incoming signal is 8 bit Click Vertical Blanking to enable vertical blanking When enabled for the 525 standard lines 1 through 9 and 264 through 272 are blanked for the 625 standard lines 1 through 5 311 through 317 624 and 625 a
283. roup Name Box 184 GUI 371 H Hard disk 372 Hardware Communication Monitor 107 255 284 Help 372 Help files 18 32 Hertz Hz 372 House Time 293 Hue 372 Icon definitions 113 I frame 22 170 372 Importing a cartridge 140 In marks 184 200 Input Clocking 96 Input device 372 Input mapping 93 Insert edit BVW 172 Profile Family 385 T Index Insert Media 260 Insert record mode 373 Inserting events 300 Installed boards information 38 Intel 1960 real time processor 24 Internal Reference Timing 49 Internal storage 23 Internal timecode generator 331 Inventorying a cartridge 144 Inventorying the library 146 IP address 243 ISA 24 J JPEG 24 175 JPEG CODECs 23 JPEG codecs assigning 217 K Keyboard 373 Keys shortcut 186 L Labeling a disk 205 LAN 36 234 242 Launching TimeDelay at start up 342 Library properties 150 Library system 373 Line formats 23 Line level 85 List building 287 editing 300 386 Profile Family event order 300 inserting events 300 opening 303 saving 302 validate 293 List Manager 35 159 281 configuring resources 315 Edit view 282 engine See Event Scheduler Engine 281 live events 297 Monitor 282 monitoring a list 293 recording 295 listnames command 250 Live events 297 Load Media 260 Loading clips 192 Loading microcode 207 Lock to Field Number 178 Locking clips 195 Log Capture Tool 214 Log file 211 Logging in 30 Logs 211 Long clip names 196 Loop 183
284. rs are a z A Z 0 9 c z Use underbar for transparent space 6 To clear entire monitor click Clear Display Click the button again to display text once more Under Windows NT 3 51 this button appears as a check box 7 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 8 Click Close to accept the changes 72 Profile Family Analog Composite Monitor Output Burn in Timecode Analog Composite Monitor Output Burn in Timecode To display burn in timecode 1 Click the Burn in Timecode tab to bring up the controls for displaying burn in timecode on the monitor see Figure 24 Analog Composite Monitor Output J12 A Monitor OutA J12 Figure 24 Analog Composite Monitor Output dialog box Burn in Timecode tab 2 To display timecode on an attached monitor select Show Hide Window 3 To display a large timecode window select Large Window Size 4 Under Window Position select the Start Row and Start Column for the timecode with the sliders This determines where the timecode is displayed on the monitor screen The current row and column are displayed on the right 5 You can display the timecode in one of four formats Click on Black on White White on Black Black on Background or White on Background 6 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 7 Click Close to accept the changes Profile Family 73 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile C
285. s A line beginning with pound sign is treated as a comment Each event is saved on a single line in the text file Individual fields of an event are separated by a comma White spaces are allowed before and after field delimiters Fields are case insensitive The format for each event is Action Clip Name Start Time Duration Type Start Date Comment other required fields depending on the action There are several other rules for list files saved as text The first event in the list file has to be an absolute event otherwise it is an error A follow event will be on the line following the parent event in the list file Each event can have only one follow event Empty lines will be ignored while parsing An error occurs if all the fields for a particular type of event are not present If an error is detected in any event while parsing the list file the event list will not be created for that file The date field will be of the format mm dd yyyy Time field both start time and the duration will be in the format Hour Min Sec Frames or Hour Min Sec Frames Allowed event actions are Play Record Switch Archive or Transfer For play and record events the Clip Name Start Time Start Date Duration Comment will be saved in the list text file For a switch event Start Time Start Date Duration Comment will be stored in the list text file For Transfer event source Profile Machine Name or IP address des
286. s Help Monitor CJ Channel A View Channel A JPEG Name Start Time Duration Comment Figure 133 List Manager window Profile Family 283 Chapter 9 Using the List Manager Whenever you start List Manager a Hardware Communication Monitor is also started if it is not already running This program makes calls to the disk recorder keeps track of the Profile host file profile hst which lists Profile systems on the network as well as remoting activities Hardware Communication Monitor Commands Number of Connections 1 Figure 134 Hardware Communication Monitor message box Viewing Help To view Help topics Choose Help Help Topics Closing List Manager To close List Manager Choose File Exit 284 Profile Family Configuring Resources Configuring Resources Before you can use List Manager you must configure video audio and timecode resources which are required for List Manager to operate You configure resources with Resource Manager To start this tool Choose Project Configure Resource Manager provides the means to add or remove channels either JPEG or MPEG add or remove video audio and timecode tracks and assign inputs and outputs to those tracks For detailed instructions on using Resource Manager see Using the Resource Manager on page 313 System resources used by List Manager are not available to other applications whether or not a list is scheduled If you
287. s in your list There are two ways to do this e If an event s type is set to Absolute you must Change the Start Time of the event so that it starts at the desired time e If an event s type is set to Follow you can Select the event by clicking on the event in the left most column of the window then drag the event to its new position to the list You can move several events by using the standard Windows operations to select a range of events Shift click to select a range or extend it then drag the selection Inserting Events 300 To insert an event in a list from a Media Manager window 1 Select a clip or master in the Media Manager contents pane 2 Drag the material to the List Manager window 3 Drop the material in the list where you want to place the new event The new material is dropped below the highlighted event To insert an event elsewhere in a list 1 Select the event that you want to insert elsewhere 2 Drag the desired event and drop it on the event The event is placed below the selected event Profile Family Removing Events From a List Removing Events From a List The On air List grows as you add events You may want to reduce the size of the On air List by deleting events that have been performed and whose status is now Done To remove unwanted events from a list 1 Select the unwanted event You can select several events by using the standard Windows operations to select more than one event
288. sent over an RS 422 line The ProLink application monitors Profile Protocol calls over an RS 422 link allowing you to use compatible hardware devices such as the PRC 100 Control Panel to issue commands to a Profile unit Windows applications are also available to control the Profile system Your disk recorder comes with several standard and optional applications See Starting and Closing Profile Applications on page 31 for more information NOTE Louth and Odetics RS 422 protocols are also supported although there is not a one to one correspondence between these protocols and the Profile API Louth and Odetics protocols do not allow you full access to the functionality of the Profile system 28 Profile Family What to Read First What to Read First The order in which you should read the chapters of this manual depends on how you want to set up your Profile system Before using your Profile unit you must first configure your video and audio boards Refer to Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager If you are upgrading a PDR 100 to version 2 5 of Profile system software from version 1 4 XX or earlier you must install enhanced disk recorder EDR boards and you must rebuild your file system To install the EDR boards you must install a field kit that is sold separately To rebuild your file system refer to Chapter 5 Using the Profile Disk Utility Your file system may consist of internal disks a disk expansi
289. session even if List Manager isn t running If you need to stop the Event Scheduler for any reason click the minimized Event Scheduler icon then type exit on the command line and press Enter List Manager lets you schedule playback record switch transfer and archive events A playback event lets you play a clip or master at a designated time while a record event allows you to record material at a given time A switch event schedules a live connection input and output are connected directly in E to E mode at a predetermined time and remain in that mode until the next playback event A transfer event schedules the copying of media from one Profile video disk recorder to another Profile unit on the network requires Ethernet and Fibre Channel connections An archive event copies media to or from a Profile library system such as the PLS 200 or PLS20 Profile Family 281 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager All of these capabilities are available on all Profile channels For example if you have four video channels you might choose to dedicate two channels to recording incoming material one for on air playback and the other for preview Each event can be scheduled to occur at an exact time on demand or it can follow other events You can override or stop a list at any time List Manager provides you with two ways of scheduling lists Monitor You can drag and drop events into the list in Monitor view to schedule them immedia
290. settings to take effect 4 Now type fcconfig again followed by Enter Fibre Channel Network Configuration PC IP AddEGSS IgE Cru os 192 168 100 1 Hardware AddrSGSsS o va erae ys y X TCP Gcheeksulls c o Aerie eerie une epit ve Disabled Auto host table administration Disabled B C SWALEGh eee vk Sheed urge Sead Rr eae AG Disabled Profile Family 245 T Chapter 7 Fibre Channel Video Networking Enabling the Fibre Channel Switch If you intend to connect your Profile system to a Fibre Channel switch instead of a loop you ll need to load the appropriate microcode for the Fibre Channel board as explained in Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities and set Fibre Channel Switch Mode ON You can do this in one of two ways Type the following command from the Command Prompt fcconfig s on OR n Configuration Manager select Enable Switch in the Fibre Channel Network Configuration dialog box see Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking on page 102 NOTE You do not need to set the Fibre Channel hardware address of Profile systems connected to the Fibre Channel switch These addresses are assigned dynamically in a fabric environment Once you ve installed the required version of Profile System Software and loaded the appropriate microcode and drivers on all the devices you are connecting to the switch you must configure each device for operation in a Fibre Channel fabric environment To configure your Fibre Chan
291. signal If the VITC signal is found the VITC Present indicator is turned on Otherwise when you do not use Automatic VITC Detect the disk recorder expects to find the VITC signals on VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 12 48 Profile Family Setting the Reference Genlock 3 Use the Field Line and Fine entries to adjust the internal timing relative to the reference input Changing this setting affects all system timing including all output timing and the input synchronized timing window Click Default to return to the default timing values 0 0 0 NOTE In order to properly time the disk recorder the Internal Reference Timing should only be changed if the downstream timing requirements cannot be met using the video output Timing Adjustment see Video Output on page 67 This should be done prior to setting individual output delay adjustments 4 Click Undo to return all values in the dialog box as they were set at the time the dialog box appeared 5 Click Close to accept the changes Profile Family 49 Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Changing LTC Input and Output Names The LTC longitudinal timecode inputs and outputs dialog box allows you to rename the LTC inputs and outputs To change an LTC name 1 Click or double click LTC Input amp Output in the configuration tree and LTC Input amp Output dialog box appears LTC Input amp Output Name Change Window Ea Input
292. splay selection dialog box If the record channel has more than one timecode track this allows you to select the one for display in the record and playback panels Auto Start Opens the auto start setup dialog box Crash Recovery Turns on auto restore mode Profile Family 363 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay 364 Profile Family Glossary Access Time The time it takes to find and retrieve digital information generally from hard disk storage AES EBU Acronym for Audio Engineering Society European Broadcasting Union an industry standard for the transmission of serial digital audio information The standard specifies the physical attributes of the link as well as how the information is transmitted along it AtoD Analog to digital converter An electronic component that converts incoming analog signals into its digital representation Analog video Video represented as a continuously variable electrical signal Consumer TV and domestic VCRs are analog video devices Analog video can be converted to digital format to be stored and manipulated by computer or other digital devices Archive library The archive library is an automated tape storage device used to supplement a machine s disk storage The library consists of digital tape cartridges and in some cases robot that moves cartridges to and from tape transports ASPB Audio signal processing board An audio board on the PDR 200 that provides 16 channels of
293. st seam teke e E RR EET RA xps 293 Scheduling a New Play Event lisse eee ee eee 294 Scheduling Recording Operations 295 Scheduling Rules and Constraints liess 296 Using a Live Feed a ons esae mr uus er Rn 297 Scheduling a Transfer Event 0 00 0c 298 Scheduling an Archive Event 0 00 eee eee eee 299 Editing Event Lists a eher moe debbie eee las 300 Changing the Order of Events 0 00 c cee eee eee 300 Inserting Events er eode biara Ges deese 300 Removing Events From a List l a anaana else 301 8 Profile Family Contents Using the Edit Window 0 2 2 ee 302 Creating a New List 0 0000 c eee eee 302 Saving ai List a Pa oles ee pa bs palang paka npag 302 Reusing a bist ete vr pA UE ERI 303 Closirig a List dick ste Re ER Mahina es 303 Exporting a List tee 303 List File ASCII Text Format ssl 304 Importing a List cem Deer Re DE p ER 306 Deleting an Entire List llle 306 Overriding Events in a List llle 307 Taking an Event eee 307 Stopping an EVEN cec teoria ears oae oed RC ee ee 307 Customizing Your List Display llle 308 Using the Event Log 0 eee eee 312 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Configuring ResourceS 0 ee ee 315 Assigning Profile Channels 00 00 e eee eee ee 315 Configuring Video Resources 0 0 aan 316 Field and Frame Setup
294. t double these capacities In addition to video compression the disk recorder boards also integrate the digital audio data coming from the EISA bus with typically four channels of audio per channel of video up to 32 These recorder boards communicate with the SCSI 2 interface using a Direct Memory Access DMA interface The PDR 200 also supports the audio signal processing board ASPB This board is capable of delivering 16 channels of analog embedded digital or AES EBU digital audio The PDR 200 can be equipped with two of these boards for a total of 32 channels of audio Video and Audio Interface Boards Video and audio interface boards receive incoming and send outgoing video and audio data These boards are responsible for converting the video and audio to internal formats used by the video server Profile Family 25 T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family The PDR200 and PDR 300 come with the Audio Signal Processing board ASPB This audio architecture accepts and simultaneously processes sixteen audio inputs and outputs Internally all audio is processed with a selectable storage resolution of 16 or 20 bits Inputs may be individually clocked in groups of four and any clock group may be referenced to the system reference house black or any one of four video inputs Output clocking is synchronous to system reference Sample rate conversion is available for all inputs 30 to 50kHz providing uniform storage at 48kHz
295. t to Satellite 1 The VITC name window title bar name and the configuration tree name automatically change as you enter the new name Names can be up to 30 characters and can include spaces To return a renamed signal to the default delete all the characters in the text field and press Enter 64 Profile Family Serial Digital Component Video Input Under Overwritable Video Standard click either 525 Video Standard or 625 Video Standard If you change this standard you must restart all tools that use this channel The video input board can serve both standards but the input can only accept one at a time Select a VITC reader setting If you to use Automatic VITC Detect the disk recorder uses the range set in the From and To lines to look for the VITC signals If Automatic VITC detect is not used the disk recorder expects to find the VITC signals on the VITC Reader Line 1 default 10 or Line 2 default 12 If the signal is found the VITC Present indicator is turned on Line 1 and Line 2 cannot be more than 14 lines apart NOTE Input must be auto timed to use automatic VITC detection If you want video input auto timed click Enable Auto Timing Auto timing determines if the input is synchronized to the reference genlock signal The disk recorder records time base corrected video whether or not it is also locked to the reference If auto timing is enabled and the signal was able to be timed into the system the Auto Timed indic
296. t to paste the item This can be another bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window If both the source and the destination locations reside on machines connected to the Fibre Channel network you may copy between machines Choose Paste from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Paste button on the toolbar A clip may be pasted into the same bin it was copied from In this case the clip is automatically renamed Media Manager automatically suggests a new name that does not conflict with any other item at the selected location The new name is based on the old name with the addition of a number source becomes source 1 When you are copying clips to a volume other than the source volume on a Profile system or an library system Paste Special is available as an option on the Edit and right click shortcut menus NOTE It is possible to play clips or masters with VdrPanel or Tool Box Editor while they are being copied over Fibre Channel To copy a bin 1 2 In either the tree pane or the contents pane select a bin Choose Copy from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Copy button on the toolbar Select another bin into which you want to paste the first bin s contents The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window If both the source and
297. ted not the media itself The Tool Box Editor is a graphical user interface that lets you create digital media by capturing video and audio clips while also providing an inexpensive cuts only editing system It lets you log video and audio material from a variety of sources such as a satellite feed live camera VTR CD player or microphone You can assemble material on disk and then send it back out to tape broadcast or archive After launching the Tool Box Editor see Figure 117 the first step you must take is to acquire resources such as codecs and audio channels with the Resource Manager Then you can capture a new clip or play an existing one Other common tasks include creating new masters playing masters creating subclips trimming clips and deleting media NOTE Profile system software version 2 5 supports Tool Box Editor version 1 1 5 Profile Family 253 Chapter 8 Using the Tool Box Editor Starting and Exiting the Tool Box Editor To start the Tool Box Editor Double click the Tool Box Editor shortcut icon on the desktop Choose Start PDR Applications Tool Box Editor NOTE The Tool Box Editor may be restarted at any time Multiple instances are allowed Project PROFILE17 channel 1 Tool Box Editor File Edit View Config Media Timeline Help mum uou liL Lu CI eso AA AA View All Media Name Start Time End Time ength Tracks LastC 5 m 10 00 00 EAEN z Capture ca KE ki Da M
298. tely Monitor displays the On air List which is the name of the list that is controlling activities on your Profile List Manager always reads the On air List and will perform the events you see in the Monitor view at their appointed times unless you delete events The On air List can t be saved for future use There is one On air List and it has a limit of 5000 events Edit Window You can build several lists in the Edit window to use at a later date or to store for repeated use Lists you build in the Edit window are not scheduled immediately When you choose the Schedule List command from the Edit menu the list is integrated into the On air List and its events are performed with other events which were already on the On air List List Manager validates the On air List to make sure that you haven t scheduled conflicting events using the same Profile resources You can then schedule the list and let List Manager control your Profile You can follow the operation of a list by using the Monitor view on any or all of your Profle s channels 282 Profile Family Starting List Manager Starting List Manager To start List Manager in Windows NT 4 0 Double click the List Manager shortcut icon on the desktop Or Choose Start Programs PDR Applications List Manager When you start List Manager for the first time your screen should look similar to the one shown in Figure 133 List Manager B042500 File Edit View Project Option
299. tempts to read a media file and for any reason it cannot read a block it does not retry but simply repeats the last field and moves on to the next block NOTE The following tests are nondestructive Testing bad blocks determines whether a bad block error is really a physical problem with the disk or just a nonrepeatable read error that can be ignored If the error is nonrepeatable the block may be removed from the bad blocks list Otherwise the block will be reallocated To test bad blocks Choose Disk Utilities Test Bad Blocks or click Test Bad Blocks To relocate bad blocks Choose Disk Utilities Relocate Bad Blocks or click Relocate Bad Blocks NOTE You must read the detail log SCSI log to view the results of these tests See The Detail Log on 209 208 Profile Family The Detail Log The Detail Log The detail log scsi log records the history of everything that happens on a disk and helps you track problems with disks For example when you relocate or test bad blocks you must read the detail log to see the results To open and read the detail log 1 Choose Disk Utilities Detail Log or click Detail Log The Detail Log dialog box appears 2 Click Close when done checking the log information Detail Log Figure 105 Detail Log dialog box NOTE Scsi log is a binary file you cannot view it with WinTail See Viewing Profile Logs on 211 for information about viewing other Profile logs
300. ter 4 Using VdrPanel Yertical Blanking Interval Storage x Compress VBI m Uncompressed lines m Luminance r Chrominance Line 10 T Line 10 Line 11 Line 11 T Line 12 T Line 12 Line 13 Line 13 Line 14 Line 14 Line 15 T Line 15 T Line 16 Line 16 T Line 17 Line 17 Line 18 T Line 18 Line 19 T Line 19 Line 20 1 M Line 21 T Line 21 Line 22 M Line 22 tees Figure 83 Vertical Blanking Interval Storage dialog box Setting up BVW insert edit Emulation This procedure sets up a panel to emulate a Betacam Refer to the manual for your hardware controller device to set up Super Edits or BVEs NOTE This procedure requires access to two control ports Close a panel to free a control port for use with the BVW insert edit panel 1 Click within a BVW insert edit panel to select the panel Refer to Selecting a Controller on page 161 if you have not already selected BVW insert edit as the controller for this panel 172 Profile Family Setting up BVW insert edit Emulation NOTE If you do not select BVW insert edit for the panel insert edit operations are not properly executed The channel can be used as a source deck or be acceptable for remote control systems such as the Ash Vale slow motion controller that do not use EditOn commands Choose Controller Configure to open Profile Options see Figure 80 on page 167 Select two unused vide
301. the configuration tree click the TC Generator button The timecode generator panel appears see Figure 164 The controls are dimmed except when Internal Generator is the timecode input Resource Manager B010278 x 89 Channel A a Channel B Name Type Add Channel Channel A Player Recorder m Remove Channel 518 Channel A CE Video H Track 1 MPEG 49 Audio Q Track 1 Track 2 la Timecode Ada Treck Track 1 Delete Track Configuration for Timecode Track 1 oj m Timecode Generator Starting Value Any 00 00 00 00 Generator Mode Fixed Time C Time of Day TC Generator Crosspoints Cancel Apply Help Figure 164 Timecode generator controls 334 Profile Family Resolving Resource Conflicts 2 Choose a generator mode You can start timecode using a fixed time or the time of day Click Time of Day to use the Windows NT clock or click Fixed Time to set a timecode value under Starting Value 3 If you selected fixed time you can use the default of 00 00 00 00 Hours Minutes Seconds Frames under Starting Value or set a new fixed starting time This setting takes effect the next time you click the Record button NOTE The Drop Frame control is hidden if your Profile system is configured for PAL video Refer to Video Input on page 52 for information about configuring the Profile system for PAL video 4 To choose drop frame click on the Drop Frame check b
302. the location where you want to paste the media To use Paste Special you must select a bin on a different volume a bin on a remote machine or a partition in a library system Choose Paste Special from the Edit menu or from the shortcut menu with aright click When the Paste Special dialog box appears click the button for the paste option you prefer then click OK Profile Family Moving Media To move a clip or master using drag and drop 1 2 In the contents window select one or more clips or masters Drag the selection and drop it at the appropriate location This can be a bin or anywhere in the contents pane when a bin is selected The selected location may even be in another Media Manager window The tree pane will automatically scroll when dragging a bin to the very top or bottom of the tree If you hold down the Ctrl key when you drop the item the item is copied to the new location not moved Dragging a clip or a master to a different machine or volume always results in a copy the original clip is not deleted When copying or moving clips to a new location if a clip or master with the same name already appears at that location you will be prompted to change the name or cancel the operation as shown in Figure 51 icq 10 28 97 already appears at this location Ski NG You may rename or skip this file or may replace the existing file Cancel fi 0 28 97 1 Help Rename All Replace Figure
303. tically switches the clamp speed to slow It is recommended that you use the spatial adaptive decode option although it does not automatically switch 6 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 7 Click Close to accept all inputs Profile Family Analog Composite Video Input Time Base Correction Analog Composite Video Input Time Base Correction The Time Base Correction tab is available only on the newer analog composite cards To select the settings 1 Click the TBC Selection tab see Figure 16 Analog Composite Video Input J5 A Composite InA J5 PL Composite Figure 16 Analog Composite Video Input dialog box Time Base Correction tab 2 When you select Time Base Correction you can select either composite input or Super VHS SVHS or S video input There are two channels available for the most recent analog composite video input board If Time Base Correction is selected in channel A channel B is unselected and vice versa 3 Click Undo to return the values in the dialog box to their original settings 4 Click Close to accept all inputs Profile Family 59 Chapter2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Analog Composite Video Input Vertical Interval For earlier analog composite cards the controls under the Vertical Interval tab sets how the vertical interval signals are handled This tab is visible only if you have an older card in your Profile unit For t
304. tility CDX 03 N7 5DI DutdJ14 LISDI DulA J14 7 EDIERTERIE SDI Dut amp J15 JSDI QutB415 INT 1 default ipeg4 00 00 10 25 error 4i INT1 default mpeg6 00 00 10 29 Stopped wi INT1 default tom1 00 00 18 25 Figure 62 Transcode Utility dialog box Preview tab 136 Profile Family Using a Library System Using a Library System Media Manager supports both the PLS20 and the PLS 200 library systems The PLS 20 Profile Library System is a stand alone drive for reading and writing to individual magnetic tape cartridges The PLS 200 Profile Library System is a robotic library that stores up to 80 magnetic tape cartridges The PLS 200 is a cost effective mechanism for spot or news storage and management plus a solution and method for the long term archival of material Total storage capacity is determined by the number of tape cartridges available and the video compression method used JPEG or MPEG Archiving a Bin or Clip To archive a clip means to copy it from disk to a cartridge in the library system Clips are always copied into the library when archived they are never moved To archive a bin means to copy all the clips and masters in the bin to the library system without having to individually select each clip or master NOTE The archiving operation copies the data to the tape cartridge but does not update the cartridge directory Updates can occur when you export the tape or when you specifically perform a
305. tination Profile Machine Name or IP address source media and the destination Profile Family media will be stored in the text file Exporting a List e For Archive event Cart Label Clip Name Partition Number and the Option Keep Delete clip after archiving will be saved Here is a sample list file in ASCII text format Play event The format is Action Start Date Comment Play INT Default River Rafting Absolute 02 02 1997 River Rafting Record event The format is Action Clip Name Clip Name Start Date Comment Record INT Default Pepsi commercial 00 01 30 00 Absolute 02 02 1997 Switch event Comment Switch 05 10 20 00 Archive event Transfer event Destination Profile Comment 00701230300 Source Profile Destination Media 05 10 20 00 Profile2 Soap Transfer Profilel Start Time Duration 05 10 20 00 Start Time Duration 00 01 30 00 Absolute Absolute Surf Soap Ad New Surf Ad Type 00 01 30 00 Type 05 10 20 00 Commerciall The format is Action Start Time Duration Type Start Date 02 02 1997 Coke The format is Action Start Time Duration Type Start Date Comment Clip Name Cart Label Path Partition Number Archive 05 10 20 00 00 01 30 00 Absolute 02 02 1997 Adi Surf Soap Labell INT Default 1 The format is Action Start Time Duration Type Start Date Source Media 02 02 1997 P
306. tion Manager You can choose only one video input at a time per track 7 Click the Crosspoints button and then select video outputs from the Video Output s check boxes The names of video outputs are determined by the system configuration created with the Configuration Manager application see Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager You can choose one or more video outputs at a time Each output corresponds to one of the video output connectors on the back of the Profile Once allocated other Profile channels cannot share assigned video outputs 320 Profile Family Configuring Video Resources Resource Manager B010278 Figure 153 MPEG video track settings Profile Family 321 Chapter 10 Using the Resource Manager Resource Manager B010278 ca Timecode fH Track 1 0 SDI OutBJ15 1 Monitor OutaJ6 Figure 154 JPEG video track settings 322 Profile Family Configuring Video Resources NOTE Use of the Advanced panel as described in the following step is necessary only if you want to specify the exact codec resource to be used By default the system will choose a codec resource for you based on availability This default option is indicated by displaying Any for your codec selection 8 Click the Advanced button and make encoder and decoder selections for MPEG see Figure 155 or a codec selection for JPEG see Figure 156 You can choose only one video encoder decoder or codec at a time
307. to 0 dB If you trim the line level for an individual channel with the slider handle the line level is incremented or decremented by 1 dB clicking on either side of the slider handle changes the line level by 0 5 dB The Level boxes show the current line level If you enter a number directly into a Level box the line level number is rounded to the nearest 0 5 dB 3 To adjust the trim for all channels at once use the Group Fader slider While the Group Fader moves all channels at once it maintains the individual channel differences 4 To mute a channel click the mute button next to the channel name 5 After you have adjusted the line levels click Close or another tab Profile Family 91 Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager Digital Audio Output You can change the names of the digital audio channels Click Undo if you want to cancel any changes Click Help for context sensitive Help on digital audio output To change a channel name 1 Expand Audio Output and then click one of the Digital Channels to bring up the Digital Audio Output dialog box Figure 39 The channel numbers on the left refer to the physical output connectors on the audio output box Ch 01 and Ch 02 refer to the channel pair on the first connector and Ch 03 and Ch 04 refer to the pair on the second connector and so forth Digital Audio Outputs J12 Outputs 9 12 x Name Ch 09 AES EBU OuS JI2 Ch 10 AES EBU Ow10J12
308. to a Remote Machine You can connect from your local Profile machine to any remote Profile machine You can also connect remotely from any PC running Windows NT 4 0 A local Profile machine refers to a Profile system to which you are directly attached A remote Profile machine refers to a Profile system that is connected to your local system via an Ethernet local area network LAN The Hardware Communication Monitor makes calls to the disk recorder manages the contents of the Profile host file profile hst owns connections to the machines listed in the host file and passes on change notifications received from each of these machines when other applications such as other instances of Media Manager are running simultaneously While Hardware Communication is initializing Media Manager shows the Hardware Communication Monitor message box If you click the OK button this message box is minimized To connect to a remote Profile machine on your Profile network 1 Choose Add Remove Machine from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click on a machine volume or network icon in the tree pane You can also click the Add Remove Machine button on the toolbar The Add Remove Machine dialog box appears see Figure 47 The label Local appears after the name of the local Profile machine Add Remove Machine Network Host List Add PROFILES PROFILE10 nase Cancel Hep Figure 47 Add Remove Machine dialog box
309. tput Mapping tab 3 Click on a button in a column This displays a list containing analog AES EBU or SDI audio groups Unavailable audio groups appear dimmed 4 Click on the group of channels you want The audio channel may be mapped to any of the outputs in groups of four 5 Click OK to accept your changes or click another tab Input Clocking The Input Clocking tab is used for assigning video input clocking sources to input audio channels The first column on the left side of the dialog box displays the disk recorder channel numbers The last column shows the audio clock reference source selection Figure 42 You get one system reference by default from the Reference Genlock boards and up to four video input references depending on which video boards are installed in your Profile unit Even if more than four video references are available only the first four input clocking references are used If you look at the bottom of the Configuration Manager window you see a graphic representation of the installed boards A key to the board representations is shown in Table 3 96 Profile Family Input Clocking Table 3 Board representation key Board Tag Board Type ma nka Vid I O SDI VA Serial digital component video 2 Vid I CAV Component analog video 1 Vid I Cmpst Analog composite video 1 The video references shown in the Input Clocking tab Video Input 1 4 correspond to the actual vi
310. transitions cuts dissolves wipes transition durations effects etc Factory default The value assigned to a parameter as delivered from the factory See Default Field A part of the total number of lines that represent a video image scanned in two passes For example an NTSC 525 line frame is divided into 262 5 line fields See Frame Firmware Software instructions that are permanently stored in the memory of a computer and are not lost when you turn the power off fps The abbreviation for frames per second the standard way of measuring the speed of video playback Thirty fps is considered real time playback in NTSC 25 fps in PAL 24 fps is standard for film and is considered animation 370 Profile Family Glossary speed playback In the range of 12 to 15 fps the human eye can detect the difference between one frame and the next visually this appears as a jerky motion or flicker Frame The standard unit of measure for film and video One frame represents one complete still image divided into two fields Frequency response The frequency range which an electronic component can accurately reproduce Humans some can hear from 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz 20 KHz An ideal audio component would have a frequency response totally flat and without any deviation from 20 Hz to 20 KHz Frequency response specifications are measured in decibels dB based on how closely an output s response resembles that of the input Gen
311. tridge Updating prior to inventorying ensures that the cartridge directory reflects all archivals renamings and deletions since the last update If you inventory the tape before you update it any changes to the tape since the last update are effectively lost To update one or more cartridges 1 In the media tree or contents pane select one or more cartridge icons 2 On the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click click Update Since the update takes several minutes to complete you are asked to confirm the operation as shown in Figure 65 Confirm Update Ed Are you sure you want to update 00000012 The cartridge may be unavailable for some operations while it is being updated Figure 65 Confirm Update dialog box 3 Click Yes to update the cartridge or cartridges Profile Family Updating and Inventorying Cartridges To inventory one or more cartridges 1 In the tree or contents pane select one or more cartridge icons 2 Choose Inventory either from the File menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click Since the inventory takes several minutes to complete you are asked to confirm the operation as shown in Figure 66 Confirm Inyentory ta Figure 66 Confirm Inventory dialog box 3 Click Yes to inventory the cartridge Profile Family 145 Chapter 3 Using Media Manager Inventorying the Library 146 There are times when the contents of the library system do not match the rec
312. uce the column width to nothing removing the column from the display To make the column visible again double click on the border you dragged then follow steps 1 and 2 To change column order 1 Select the column you wish to move by clicking on its title You can select more than one column by clicking in one column title then dragging the mouse pointer through the adjacent titles you wish to select Drag the selected column or columns to the desired destination Profile Family 311 T Chapter 9 Using the List Manager 312 Using the Event Log As events are performed in the On air List a record of those operations is kept in a file called c profile evntsch log You can extract information from this log file for record keeping billing or any other purpose where accurate records are required The information in the log file is stored as ASCII text in tabular form separated by commas You can use a text editor to read the file but be careful not to save any changes you may make You can see an example of a section of a log file in Figure 147 Ej evntsch log Notepad olx File Edit Search Help Log opened Mon Jul 22 68 39 63 1996 C6 Play Status Channel Play s Absolute 67 22 1996 68 41 23 11 00 00 07 0909 68 41 36 11 Absolute 67 22 1996 808 52 05 06 66 66 67 66 68 42 11 66 Type Start Time End Time User Name Event Title Event Type Date Scheduled Reserved List Name Duration Figur
313. udio suitable for amplification Disk expansion unit A product PDX 103 and PDX 208 that adds disk storage to a Profile video disk recorder Disk Utility The Profile Disk Utility tool is used to maintain Profile hard drives This includes formatting and labeling disk volumes eliminating bad blocks and updating hard drives with new microcode Display A device that receives video output from a display adapter such as VGA card and displays the video output on a screen Dragging Pressing and holding down the left mouse button while moving the pointer The mouse pointer must be over an object such as a file Profile Family 369 T Glossary Drop frame In NTSC you dont actually get 30 frames per second the real number is about 29 97 fps Timecode usually assumes 30 fps To account for the discrepancy drop frame timecode skips or drops two timecode values at the beginning of every minute except every tenth minute This allows timecode to exactly match a real time clock on 525 60 systems This correction is not needed on 625 50 systems because the frame rate is exactly 50 fps E to E EE Electronics to Electronics mode routes audio and video input directly to output Edit The process of creating or refining a sequence of media clips in a specific order EDL An Edit Decision List is a list of events that include the source to be recorded and where to record it In addition an EDL can include information about
314. uggested If you change the name and it is not unique you will be prompted to enter a new name or cancel the save operation Use the Save in combo box to choose a bin for the movie Click the OK button Saving a large record buffer as a movie will reduce the amount of available disk storage This may effect the TimeDelay application s ability to function Profile Family 353 T Chapter 11 Using TimeDelay Working with the Playback Panel The Playback Panel allows you to control the playout delay for the playback channel that it represents Setting a Playout Delay To set a playout delay enter the delay duration in the Playback Panel s Playout Delay edit box The minimum playout delay is five seconds the maximum delay is five seconds less than the current record buffer size TimeDelay automatically adjusts playout delays that are too large or too small to the closest valid value Starting a Playback Channel Immediately To immediately start a playback channel 1 Start the TimeDelay process 2 In the appropriate playback panel click the Play button Starting playback with the Play button overrides the delay time Once the channel begins playing the delay time is automatically adjusted to reflect the difference between the record and play positions 354 Profile Family Working with the Playback Panel Modifying a Playout Delay To modify a playout delay after the TimeDelay process has started 1 In the Playback Panel c
315. uired connectors for use with the Fibre Channel switch You must obtain cables appropriate for use with the switch The pinout for a 9 pin D type connector to 9 pin D type connector is as follows e Pin 1 to5 and pin 5 to 1 Pin6 to 9 and pin 9 to 6 242 Profile Family Setting Up Software for Fibre Channel Setting Up Software for Fibre Channel A common mistake is to set the IP address of the Fibre Channel board to the same IP address as the Ethernet network This is wrong they must be separate networks Each Profile unit has a computer name often the serial number of the unit But some people like to change it to something more meaningful such as PROFILE1 or PROFILE2 For Fibre Channel you must set up two IP addresses for each Profile one for the Ethernet card and the other for the Fibre Channel board Here are some made up IP addresses for two Profiles units Computer Name PROFILE1 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 1 FC Address 192 168 100 1 Computer Name PROFILE2 Ethernet Address 192 168 99 2 FC Address 192 168 100 2 You can use the these addresses if you want but if your Ethernet boards are connected to your company computer network check with your system administrator for the correct IP addresses to use Ethernet IP Address Set Up To set the TCP IP address for the Ethernet network 1 Login as administrator 2 Choose Start Settings Control Panel or double click the My Computer icon on the Windows NT 4 0 desktop
316. unications interface for data communications similar to RS 232 C but good for longer distance cabling It is typically used for communications in a broadcast or post production environment between devices such as VTRs mixers and controllers SCSI Channel Small Computer System Interface The interface between the Profile processor and the disk array or library system It is fast and wide and provides for speeds up to 20 Mbytes second on a 16 bit bus SDI An acronym for Serial Digital Interface a standard for transmitting CCIR 601 digital video over a pair of conductors coaxial cable SECAM France and Russia use the S quence Couleur A M moire standard color format Serial port Usually the standard RS 232 C of a personal computer Attach a serial cable to communicate with a peripheral device such as a modem or printer S N Ratio The Signal to Noise Ratio measured in decibels is the ratio between the maximum signal level and the noise level with no signal present The higher the value the better the sound reproduction Source In Profile operations a source is any signal video audio or timecode presented to the machine inputs A VTR output a satellite downlink a camera output and a facility router output are all examples of sources Profile Family 377 T Glossary Status bar The status bar at the bottom of most windows provides status information short explanations of commands and errors Tape
317. urce Lines Resource lines allocate a resource for use by a port The following is the column by column layout of resource lines Column 1 2 resource type Must be one of the following O0 audio codec 01 JPEG codec 02 video input 03 video output 04 LTC input 05 VITC input 06 timecode generator 07 LTC output 08 VITC output 09 timecode recorder 10 audio output 11 videocombiner mix effect 12 MPEG decoder 13 MPEG encoder Column 3 separator e Column 4 5 resource number This specifies which resource of the specified type is desired Resources of a given type are numbered starting at 0 To select the third timecode recorder specify 02 in columns 4 5 For inputs and outputs spread across multiple cards devices are scanned along the Profile EISA bus starting at slot 0 Viewed from the back of the Profile system numbers increment from right to left In a Profile system with two Serial Digital I O cards video input 00 represents the upper BNC connector on the rightmost Serial Digital card while video input 03 represents the second BNC connector on the leftmost Serial Digital card Manually Editing a Configuration File In Profile systems with a mix of video I O cards the video cards are scanned in the following order Serial Digital Component Serial Digital Component with Embedded Audio Component Analog Composite Analog Serial Digital Composite For example in a Profile syste
318. vailable storage TimeDelay automatically reduces the value to reflect the largest possible duration If you enter a buffer size that is smaller than the longest playout delay TimeDelay automatically increases the value to reflect the smallest buffer size that can encompass the longest playout delay Changing the Record Buffer s Location By default the TimeDelay Record buffer is created on the first internal disk volume To change the record buffer s location to a different drive 1 Choose File Set Buffer Drive to open the dialog box shown here TimeDelay Buffer Location Ea Drive f 1 INT1 m H Cancel Figure 175 TimeDelay Buffer Location dialog box 2 Select the appropriate drive 3 Click the OK button Profile Family Working with the Record Buffer Saving the Record Buffer Contents as a Profile Movie Each time the TimeDelay process is started the disk storage used by the record buffer is deleted The Save Buffer operation allows you to save the contents of the record buffer before closing or restarting the TimeDelay process To save the record buffer contents as a Profile movie do the following 1 3 4 On the File menu click Save Buffer As This opens the dialog shown below Save TimeDelay Clip x Name TimeDelayClip 2 Save in Tur default Cancel Enter a name for the movie This movie name must be unique When the dialog is opened a unique default name is s
319. ve Master Fibre MPEG Not Audl O Not Not KO Genlock YA YA DiskRec DiskRec Network Known Known Digital Known Known For Help press F1 CAP NUM sg Figure 3 Profile Configuration Manager window Profile Family 37 T Chapter 2 Using the Profile Configuration Manager To select an item from the configuration tree e 2The configuration tree appears on the left side of the window Clicking on an entry such as Video Input expands the list of choices Clicking on an expanded list of choices such as if you click on Video Input a second time collapses the list of choices e 2A single click opens the specific dialog box closing a previously opened box if necessary A double click opens the specific dialog box but does not close any other open dialog boxes To close all open dialog boxes at once choose Window Close All All changes in a dialog box take place immediately The Undo button will undo changes from the time a dialog box was opened in the current tab of the dialog box The Undo button is dimmed if there is nothing to undo The Help button opens context sensitive help related to the current dialog box By default the toolbar and status bar are shown in the Configuration Manager window To hide the toolbar or status bar Choose View Toolbar or View Status Bar To view information about installed boards Choose Help Installed Boards Information 38 Profile Family Saving a Configuration File Saving a Confi
320. ve directly to the beginning without shuttling The Record button starts storing the incoming video as JPEG or MPEG streams and audio under the selected clip name If no clip is selected a default clip name pound sign followed by a number is assigned See Defining a New Clip on page 190 The record process continues until the disk decoder runs out of storage space or you click another command button such as Stop Recording does not start unless there is a video signal assigned to the selected panel and there is disk storage available The Fast Forward button shuttles the clip forward to the end Use Go to Clip End or enter a value in the Timecode box to move directly to the end of the clip without shuttling The Field Selection button selects a one field or two field display during still mode One field display eliminates temporal artifacts while two field display provides the best vertical resolution Profile Family 10 11 12 13 Panel Basics The Normal normal plays the selected clip or clip list to the end freezing on the last field of the clip or of the last clip in the list The Loop button plays the selected clip or clip list continuously looping back to the beginning of the clip when the clip ends or in the case of a clip list looping back to the first clip in the list when the last clip ends If you create a clip while in Loop mode you are asked to enter a clip length in the form 00 00
321. verse direction see Figure 129 The Previous Frame and Next Frame buttons display the last or next frame The Previous Event and Next Event buttons move the current position to the next user mark mark in or mark out points Shuttle Controls The shuttle rate slider sets the play speed in the range 16 to 16 The play speed increases as you move the slider to the right and decreases you as you move the slider to the left You can also adjust the play speed with the shuttle rate input box Simply type in the rate in the range 16 to 16 and press Enter The selected clip begins playing automatically whenever you adjust the shuttle rate Creating Subclips on the Fly To create a subclip on the fly either while recording a new clip or by playing an existing clip 1 To start recording choose Record from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Record button A new clip appears in the current bin display whose duration grows longer with each new frame recorded 2 To play an existing clip select a clip in the current bin display choose Load from the Media menu or from the shortcut menu with a right click You can also click the Load button on the current bin toolbar Then click the Play button 3 Enter a new subclip name in the clip name field or accept the default name 4 To create a clip on the fly click Create Mark in This starts the new clip A new clip name appears in the current
322. w This Fibre Channel IP address should be different from the Ethernet IP address assigned to this machine Auto hosts file administration for TCP IP name lookup Use TCP Checksums Enable Multicast Enable Switch Hostname vaiab3_feO OO IP Address 128 181 59 3 Clear Netmask bag Clear Gateway ls 4 3 Hardware Address 1 120 O auto 3 OK Cancel Figure 45 Fibre Channel Network Configuration dialog box 10 11 Setting Up Fibre Channel Networking Click Auto hosts administration for TCP IP name lookup When selected the PDR Network Configuration Service fcncs exe automatically administers the file c winnt system32 drivers etc hosts Click Use TCP Checksum When selected a checksum is used to aid in error checking Click Enable Multicast if the Fibre Channel Multicast option is installed and you want to enable it This checkbox is dimmed if the option is not installed Disabling the option even though it is installed can be done to avoid unintentional file transfers or the need to manage the feature if it is not in use Click Enable Switch to enable the Fibre Channel driver to communicate with Fibre Channel switches This box should be checked if your Profile unit is directly connected to a Fibre Channel switch fabric The Hostname box shows the name of the Profile host with a unique Fibre Channel identifier appended to it in this case _fc0 Enter dott
323. x2 vid in vid out 01 03 CD Default connect video input video codec 03 02 CS Schedule connect video codec video output Profile Family 229 T Chapter 6 Using Profile Utilities now do the audio connections 1 4 00 00 index 4 audio codecs 00 01 index 5 audio codecs 00 02 index 6 audio codecs 00 03 index 7 audio codecs 10 00 index 8 audio outputs 1 4 10 01 index 9 10 02 index 10 10 03 index 11 now do the ITC to recorder 1 04 00 S index 12 ITC input 07 00 index 13 LTC output 09 00 index 14 tcRecorder 12 15 055 12 64 D 14 13 CS manually add these lines to add a second Jpeg Codec 02 00 S index 15 video input 0 shared 03 01 index 16 video output 1 01 01 100000 index 17 video codec 1 at 100KB 15 16 CD Default connect index15 5index16 vid in gt vid out L5 1 7 CD Default connect video input video codec 17 16 CS8 Schedule connect video codec video output 230 Sample Configuration Files Assigning an MPEG encoder This example assigns an MPEG encoder rather than a JPEG codec It also illustrates how to assign both LTC and VITC timecode resources for a channel The sample file is supplied as mpegEnc cfg in the c Profile configs directory on the Profile system drive Sample Config File for an MPEG Encoder first do the video system format is 2 digit base 10 numbers
324. y it uses lower data rates because it does not duplicate video that does not change from frame to frame MPEG accomplishes this through both backward and forward prediction To do this it uses GOPs consisting of I frames P pictures and B pictures Profile Family T Chapter 1 Introducing the Profile Family An I frame also known as an I picture or Intra picture is analogous to a single motion JPEG frame where all data required to display a frame is stored in one picture A P picture also called a predictive picture uses a motion vector to predict what will happen in the next frame and contains only the changed data rather than passing along another complex frame of video In addition a B picture known also as a bidirectional picture relies on data from both backward and forward motion vectors to determine how a future frame will be composed In general the longer the GOP the more efficient your MPEG video stream will be Table 1 compares the capabilities of the PDR 100 and PDR 200 300 The optional products supported by these disk recorders are listed here MPEG encoder decoder board optional PDR 200 standard PDR 300 Fibre Channel interface board Video mix effects board PDX103 and PDX208 Profile Disk Expansion Units PAC208 and PAC216 Analog Digital Audio Interface chassis PDR 200 300 XLR216 and BNC216 Digital Audio Interface chassis PDR 200 300 PRS200 and PRS250 Profile RAID Storage Systems PLS20 an
325. you open the desired port from the application such as the PRC 100 You should create as many files as you require for your application Manually Editing a Configuration File Manually Editing a Configuration File In some special cases you may wish to manually edit a configuration file For example you may wish to assign more than one video codec for use with a channel You can use any text editor to make changes to an existing configuration file Notepad will save your file in the required format If you decide to use any other editor such as WordPad be sure to save the file as a text document ASCII or txt and use the cfg filename extension if you change the name of the file Configuration files are simple text files containing three types of lines The lines are parsed on a column basis as follows If column 1 contains anything besides a number from 0 9 the line is ignored as a comment line Ter If column 7 contains a C or c the line is treated as a crosspoint line All other lines are treated as resource lines Both resource allocation lines and crosspoint lines share a similar format xx yy funcl func2 NOTE Although resource and crosspoint lines look similar they have very different meanings This is a frequent source of confusion and error Make sure whether you are editing a resource line ora crosspoint line Profile Family 221 T Chapter 6 222 Using Profile Utilities Reso
326. ze box shows the number of bytes stored for the current field The more detailed the picture the higher the number of bytes Target compression rate is set in the Edit Presets dialog box accessed from Controller Configure See Configuring a Controller on page 165 The Timecode box is the current timecode of the selected clip To configure timecode refer to Setting Timecode on page 177 For example when you use slow motion replays from several camera angles the timecode can free run or freeze Clicking on the Timecode box brings up the Go To Timecode Profile Family 181 T Chapter 4 Using VdrPanel 182 dialog box Entering a new timecode value and clicking OK moves a clip to a specific timecode location If there is no recorded timecode VdrPanel displays a timecode calculated from the current position 00 00 00 00 or above Go To Timecode Enter time code SOO o min sec frm The Play button runs the selected clip at normal speed If there are multiple clips in the clip list Play starts with the first selected clip and proceeds through the list Normal Loop and Bounce modes determine how the clip or clip list is played The Stop button halts the current Play shuttle or Record function The Rewind button shuttles the clip backwards to the beginning the first available field or in mark of the selected clip Use Go To Clip Beginning or enter a timecode value in the Timecode box to mo

User Manual - Grass Valley

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents